FCC ID: IHDT56CA1 Portable Cellular/PCS Transceiver (AMPS/TDMA)

 

APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT56CA1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL An updated Users Manual follows:

EXHIBIT 8A DIGITAL WIRELESS TELEPHONE User's Guide >

Welcome Welcome to the world of Motorola digital wireless communications! We are pleased that you have chosen the Motorola 120t wireless phone. Earpiece Power Key Headset Jack Insert headset accessory. Display Volume Keys Adjust earpiece and ringer volume. Left Soft Key Perform functions identied by left display prompt. End Key End phone calls, exit menu system. Antenna Menu Key Voice Key Record voice notes, phonebook and shortcut names. Right Soft Key Perform functions identied by right display prompt. Send Key Send and answer calls, view recent dialed calls list. Scroll Keys Move through menus and lists. Microphone 1 Accessory Connector Port Insert charger and phone accessories.

(United States)

(Canada) Personal Communications Sector 600 North U.S. Highway 45 Libertyville, Illinois 60048 1-800-331-6456 (United States) 1-888-390-6456 (TTY/TDD United States) 1-800-461-4575 (Canada) www.motorola.com www.motorola.ca MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. TrueSync, Sidekick, Starsh, and the Stylized Starsh Logo are registered trademarks of Starsh Software, Inc., a wholly owned independent subsidiary of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. 2002 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Software Copyright Notice The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be modied, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Manual number: 6809438A79-O Cover number:

8988485L49-O 2

Menu Map Main Menu Recent Calls Received Calls Dialed Calls Notepad Call Times Phonebook Datebook Quick Dial Radio Messages Create Msg Voicemail Text Msgs Quick Notes Outbox Drafts Ring Styles Style Style Detail My Tones Shortcuts Voice Notes Browser Calculator Games Settings

(see next page) Note: This is the standard phone menu layout. You or your service provider may have changed the menu layout or changed some feature names. Not all features may be available for all users. For example, the Radio feature on the main menu (left) is displayed only when the optional FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory is plugged into the accessory connector port on your phone

(see phone illustration, page 1). Shortcuts Change display zoom:

Press M, then press and hold M Lock/unlock keypad:

Press M *

Display my phone number:

Press M #

Go to dialed calls list:

Press N Exit menu system:

Press O 3 Settings Menu

Other Settings Personalize Main Menu Keys Greeting Quick Dial Initial Setup Time and Date Backlight Zoom TTY Setup Scroll Animation Language Battery Save Contrast DTMF Master Reset Master Clear Network Car Settings Headset Phone Status My Tel. Number Active Line Battery Meter Other Information Connection Incoming Call In-Call Setup In-Call Timer Answer Options Security Phone Lock Lock Keypad Lock Application Talk Secure Restrict Calls New Passwords 4 Contents About Your Phone Menu Map About This Guide Safety and General Information Getting Started

. 3

. 10

. 11

. 18 Whats in the Box? . 18 Installing the Battery . 18 Charging the Battery . 19 Turning Your Phone On . 21 Making a Call . 21 Ending a Call . 22 Answering a Call . 22 Seeing Your Phone Number . 22

. 23 Using the Display . 23 Zooming In and Out . 25 Adjusting Volume . 25 Battery Use . 25

. 28 Redialing a Number . 28 Using Caller ID . 28 Using Talk Secure . 28 Returning an Unanswered Call . 29 Calling an Emergency Number . 29 Turning Off a Call Alert . 30 Canceling an Incoming Call . 30 Calling With Speed Dial . 31 Calling With One-Touch Dial . 31 Making and Answering Calls C o n t e n t s 5 Entering Text Using the Menu Using Features While On a Call Calling a Number In a Text Message . 31 Additional Calling Features . 32

. 33 Using Call Waiting . 33 Making a Three-Way Call . 33 Additional On-Call Features . 34

. 35 Navigating to a Feature . 35 Selecting a Feature Option . 36 Entering Feature Information . 37

. 39 Choosing a Text Mode . 39 Using Tap Method . 40 Using Symbol Mode . 43 Using iTAP Software Predictive Text Entry Method 44

. 48

. 59 Viewing Received Calls or Dialed Calls . 59 Using the Notepad . 61 Viewing and Resetting Call Timers . 61

. 64 Viewing Entry Details . 64 Storing a Phonebook Entry . 65 Storing a PIN Code With the Phone Number . 67 Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry . 69 Dialing a Phonebook Entry . 70 Editing a Phonebook Entry . 71 Deleting a Phonebook Entry . 71 Setting the Primary Number for a Phonebook Entry . 71 Checking Phonebook Capacity . 72 Sorting the Phonebook List . 73 Menu Feature Descriptions Recent Calls Phonebook s t n e t n o C 6 Radio Datebook MessagesVoicemail

. 75 Week View . 75 Day View . 76 Event View . 76 Adding a Datebook Event . 77 Changing Event Information . 77 Copying an Event . 78 Deleting an Event . 79

. 80 Turning the Radio On and Off . 80 Tuning a Station . 81 Storing a Preset . 81 Selecting a Preset . 81 Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On . 81

. 83 Storing Your Voicemail Number . 83 Receiving a Voicemail Message . 84 Listening to a Voicemail Message . 84

. 85 Setting Up the Text Message Inbox . 85 Receiving a Text Message . 86 Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message . 87 Storing Sounds . 90 Sending a Text Message . 91 Sending a Quick Note Text Message . 93 Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages . 94

. 95 Selecting a Ring Style . 95 Customizing a Ring Style . 95 Creating Alert Tones . 97 Setting Reminders . 104 MessagesText Ring Styles C o n t e n t s 7 Shortcuts Voice Notes Micro-Browser Calculator Games

. 105 Standard Shortcuts . 105 Creating a Shortcut . 105 Using Shortcuts . 107

. 108 Recording a Voice Note . 108 Viewing the Voice Notes List . 109 Playing a Voice Note . 110 Locking and Unlocking a Voice Note . 112 Deleting a Voice Note . 113

. 114 Starting a Micro-Browser Session . 114 Interacting With Web Pages . 115

. 116 Calculating Numbers . 116 Converting Currency . 118

. 119 Playing a Game . 119 Game Options . 120 Blackjack . 120 Falling Numbers . 121 Video Poker . 122

. 124 Reordering Menu Items . 124 Customizing a Soft Key Function . 124 TTY Operation . 125 Hands-Free Use . 127

. 131 Connecting Your Phone to an External Device . 131 Sending a Data Call . 134 Receiving a Data Call . 135 Adjusting Your Settings Data Calls s t n e t n o C 8 Security

. 137 Assigning a New Code or Password . 137 If You Forget a Code or Password . 138 Locking and Unlocking Your Phone . 139 Locking and Unlocking Your Keypad . 140 Restricting Calls . 140 Activating Talk Secure . 142

. 143

. 152

. 154

. 157

. 166

. 173

. 173

. 174

. 187 Troubleshooting Programming Instructions Specic Absorption Rate Data Additional Health and Safety Information Warranty Product Registration Export Law Assurances Index Wireless Phone Safety Tips C o n t e n t s 9 About This Guide This user guide introduces you to the many features in your Motorola wireless phone. Navigating To a Menu Feature Use the menu system to access your phones features. This guide shows you how to select a menu feature as follows:

Find the Feature M

Messages Text Msgs This example shows that you must press and select Optional Features M

, then scroll to and select Messages

, scroll to

. Text Msgs This label identies an optional network or subscription-dependent feature that may not be offered by all service providers in all geographical areas. Contact your service provider for more information. Optional Accessories This label identies a feature that requires an optional Motorola Original accessory. e d i u G s i h T t u o b A 10 Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR PHONE. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to July 2000. For information regarding radio use in a hazardous atmosphere please refer to the Factory Mutual

(FM) Approval Manual Supplement or Instruction Card, which is included with radio models that offer this capability. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RF Operational Characteristics Your phone contains a transmitter and a receiver. When it is ON, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) energy. The phone operates in the frequency range of 824 MHz to 849 MHz in analog and digital mode and 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz in digital mode. When you communicate with your phone, the system handling your call controls the power levels at which your phone transmits. The output power level typically may vary over a S a f e t y a n d G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n 11 range from 0.00 watts to 0.35 watts in analog mode and 0.00 watts to 0.56 watts in digital mode. Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy Your Motorola phone is designed to comply with the following national and international standards and guidelines regarding exposure of human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic energy:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) of the United States, Report 86, 1986 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation-Human Exposure) Standard 1999 To assure optimal phone performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within n o i t a m r o f n I l a r e n e G d n a y t e f a S 12 the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:

Portable Phone Operation and EME Exposure Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modications, or attachments could damage the phone and may violate FCC regulations. Do NOT hold the antenna when the phone is in use. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed. Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your phone as you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the microphone. Body-Worn Operation To maintain compliance with FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a phone on your body when transmitting, always place the phone in a Motorola-supplied or approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may exceed FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use one of the Motorola-supplied or approved body-worn accessories, and are not using the phone held in the normal use position, ensure the phone and its antenna are at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body when transmitting. S a f e t y a n d G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n 13 Data Operation When using any data feature of the phone, with or without an accessory cable, position the phone and its antenna at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body. Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories, visit our website at www.mot.com. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise congured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conicts, turn off your phone in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your phone when on board an aircraft. Any use of a phone must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be n o i t a m r o f n I l a r e n e G d n a y t e f a S 14 maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by, and recommendations of, the United States Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:

ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches

(15 centimeters) from your pacemaker when the phone is turned ON. NOT carry the phone in the breast pocket. use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. turn OFF the phone immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Safety and General Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the area where you drive. Always obey them. S a f e t y a n d G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n 15 When using your phone while driving, please:

give full attention to driving and to the road. use hands-free operation, if available. pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Operational Warnings For Vehicles With an Air Bag Do not place a portable phone in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inate with great force. If a portable phone is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inates, the phone may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your phone prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless the phone is a model specically identied as being Intrinsically Safe. Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or re resulting in bodily injury or even death. Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. n o i t a m r o f n I l a r e n e G d n a y t e f a S 16 Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn OFF your phone when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Operational Cautions Antennas Do not use any portable phone that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. ITC01-101 S a f e t y a n d G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n 17 Getting Started Whats in the Box?

Your wireless phone typically comes equipped with a battery and a charger. Other accessory options can customize your phone for maximum performance and portability. To purchase Motorola Original accessories, contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456 in the United States or 1-800-461-4575 in Canada. Installing the Battery You must install and charge the battery to use your phone. Your phone is designed to be used only with Motorola Original batteries and accessories. We recommend that you store batteries in their protective cases when not in use. Do This 1 Remove the battery from its protective clear plastic case. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 18 Do This 2 If necessary, slide down the battery door release latch and lift the door off of the phone. 3 Insert the battery, printed arrows rst, into the top of the battery compartment and push down. 4 Replace the battery door. Release latch Charging the Battery New batteries are shipped partially charged. Before you can use your phone, you need to install and charge the battery, as indicated by the following instructions. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 19 Some batteries perform best after several full charge/

discharge cycles. Do This 1 Plug the travel charger into your phone with the release tab facing up. Release tab 2 Plug the other end of the travel charger into the appropriate electrical outlet. 3 When your phone indicates that the battery is fully charged (Charge Complete), press the release tab and remove the travel charger. Notes:

When you charge the battery, the battery level indicator in the upper right corner of the display shows how much of the charging process is complete. If the battery charge drops too low, your phone may power off during a call, even when the charger is connected. To avoid this possibility, do not make calls while charging the battery. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 20 Turning Your Phone On Do This 1 Press and hold P turn on your phone To Power key 2 If necessary, enter your four-digit unlock code and press OK (+) unlock your phone The unlock code is originally set to 1234. Your service provider may change this number before you receive your phone. Making a Call Press 1 keypad keys 2 N To dial the phone number Tip: If you make a mistake, press DELETE (-) to delete the last digit, or press and hold DELETE (-) to clear all digits. make the call G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 21 Ending a Call Press O To end the call Answering a Call When you receive a call, your phone rings and/or vibrates and displays an incoming call message. Press N or ANSWER (+) To answer the call Tip: If your phone is locked, you must unlock it to answer the call. Seeing Your Phone Number Press M #

To see your phone number d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 22 About Your Phone See page 1 for a basic phone diagram. Using the Display In Use Indicator Roam Indicator Message Waiting Indicator Digital/

Analog Signal Indicator Signal Strength Indicator Ring Style Indicator 5 w O,X&

12:00am F E P PH.BOOK M MESSAGE

Menu Indicator Soft Key Labels Voice Message Waiting Indicator Battery Level Indicator Active line Indicator Clock The idle display is the standard display that you see when you are not on a call or using the menu. Labels at the bottom corners of the display show the current soft key functions. A M (menu) indicator at the bottom center of the display indicates that you can press M to enter the main menu. A b o u t Y o u r P h o n e 23

Signal Strength Indicator Vertical bars show the strength of the network connection. You cannot make or receive calls when the j (no signal) indicator is displayed. Digital (F) or Analog (I) Signal Indicator Shows whether you are receiving a digital or analog signal. In Use Indicator Shows that a call is in progress. Roam Indicator Shows that your phone is seeking or using another network system outside your home network. Message Waiting Indicator Appears when you receive a text message. Voice Message Waiting Indicator Appears when you receive a voicemail message. Battery Level Indicator Vertical bars show the battery charge level. Recharge the battery when you see Low Battery and hear the low battery alert. Active Line Indicator Shows the current active phone line. Menu Indicator Indicates that you can press M to enter the main menu or open a feature sub-menu. e n o h P r u o Y t u o b A 24

Ring Style Indicator Shows the ring style setting. w = loud ring y = vibrate t = silent x = soft ring u = vibrate and ring Zooming In and Out Press and release M, then press and hold M to zoom in and out on the display. Zoom in to increase text size, zoom out to display more information. You can also zoom in and out from the menu. See page 55. Adjusting Volume Press the up and down volume keys to:

Volume keys increase and decrease earpiece volume during a call increase and decrease the ringer volume setting when the idle display is visible Battery Use Battery performance depends on many factors, including your wireless carriers network conguration;

signal strength; the temperature at which you operate your A b o u t Y o u r P h o n e 25

phone; the features and/or settings you select and use;

and your voice, data, and other application usage patterns. Battery Care Caution: To prevent injuries or burns, do not allow metal objects to contact or short-circuit the battery terminals. To maximize your batterys performance:

Always use Motorola Original batteries and battery chargers. The phone warranty does not cover damage caused from using non-Motorola batteries and/or battery chargers. New batteries or batteries that have been stored for long periods of time may require a longer charge time. Maintain the battery at or near room temperature when charging. Do not expose batteries to temperatures below

-10C (14F) or above 45C (113F). Always take your phone with you when you leave your vehicle. When you do not intend to use a battery for a while, store it uncharged in a cool, dark, dry place, such as a refrigerator. Over extended periods of time, batteries gradually wear down and require longer charging times. This is normal. If you charge your battery regularly and notice a decrease in talk time or an increase in charging time, then it is probably time to purchase a new battery. e n o h P r u o Y t u o b A 26 The rechargeable batteries that power this product must be disposed of properly and may need to be recycled. Refer to your batterys label for battery type. Contact your local recycling center for proper disposal methods. Never dispose of batteries in a re because they may explode. Extending Battery Life Turn off your display backlight The backlight uses power. To turn it off, see page 55. Minimize keypad-intense functions Activities that require intensive keystroke use (such as playing a game or using messaging) reduce your phones talk and standby time. Lock the keypad when storing the phone in your purse or pocket to avoid unnecessary keypad and backlight activations. See page 140. A b o u t Y o u r P h o n e 27 Making and Answering Calls For basic instructions on how to make a call, end a call, and answer a call, see pages 2122. Redialing a Number If you hear an ordinary busy signal:

Press 1 O 2 N To hang up redial the busy number Using Caller ID Calling line identication (caller ID) displays the phone number for incoming calls. The phone displays the callers name when the name is stored in your phonebook, or Incoming Call when caller ID information is not available. Using Talk Secure When talk secure is activated, your phone always tries to use a high-security connection to prevent others from intercepting your calls. To activate talk secure, see page 142. s l l a C g n i r e w s n A d n a g n i k a M 28 If a high-security connection is not available, your phone uses a standard connection and displays Line Not Secure. This message does not appear when caller ID or other information is displayed. Returning an Unanswered Call Your phone keeps a record of your unanswered calls, and displays:

the T (missed call) indicator X Missed Calls Y Unknown, where X is the total number of missed calls and Y is the number of missed calls with no caller ID information Press 1 VIEW (+) 2 S 3 N To see the received calls list select a call to return make the call Calling an Emergency Number Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911, that you can call under any circumstances, even when your phone is locked. Note: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your phones preprogrammed emergency number(s) may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be M a k i n g a n d A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 29 placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. Press 1 keypad keys 2 N To dial the emergency number call the emergency number Turning Off a Call Alert You can turn off your phones incoming call alert before answering the call. Press either volume key To turn off the alert Canceling an Incoming Call While the phone is ringing or vibrating:

Press O or IGNORE (-) To cancel the incoming call Depending on your phone settings and/or service subscription, the call may be forwarded to another number, or the caller may hear a busy signal. s l l a C g n i r e w s n A d n a g n i k a M 30 Calling With Speed Dial Each entry you store in your phonebook is assigned a unique speed dial number. To speed dial a phonebook entry:

Press 1 keypad keys 2 #

3 N To enter the speed dial number for the entry you want to call submit the number call the entry Calling With One-Touch Dial To call phonebook entries 1 through 9, just press and hold the one-digit speed dial number for one second. We recommend that you reserve phonebook entry 1

(speed dial number 1) for storing and dialing your voicemail number. In many cases, your service provider has already done this for you. If necessary, see page 65 to store your voicemail number for one-touch dial access. Calling a Number In a Text Message To call a phone number embedded in a text message that you receive:

M a k i n g a n d A n s w e r i n g C a l l s 31 Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) To open the Text Msg Menu scroll to Call Back call the number s Additional Calling Features While dialing (with digits visible in the display), open the Dialing Menu to perform the following tasks:

Press M

> Attach Number M

> Send Message To attach a number from the phonebook or recent call lists open a new text message with the number in the To eld You can also call a number using these features:

Do This Press and release the voice key, then say a voice name Voice key To Call a phonebook entry using voice dial To record a voice name, see page 69. Press M > Recent Calls

> Received Calls or Dialed Calls > entry to call a missed call, or a recent received or dialed call l l a C g n i r e w s n A d n a g n i k a M 32 Using Features While On a Call Using Call Waiting When you are on a call, an alert tone sounds to indicate that you have received a second call. Press 1 N 2 N To answer the new call switch back to the rst call Making a Three-Way Call During a call, you can call and connect a third party for a three-way call. You cannot do this if you already have a call on hold. Press 1 keypad keys 2 N 3 N 4 O To dial the third partys number call the number connect the two calls end the entire call U s i n g F e a t u r e s W h i l e O n a C a l l 33 Additional On-Call Features Press MUTE (+) (if available) or M > Mute SPEAKER (+) (if available) or M > Spkrphone On M > My Tel. Number M > Send Tones M > Received Calls or Dialed Calls M > Messages M > Datebook M

> Other Information To mute the call activate an attached speakerphone during an active call see your phone number send a number to the network as DTMF tones, for credit card or password calls To activate DTMF tones, see the DTMF option on page 56. view recent received or dialed call numbers view or send messages view datebook entries view phone specications l l a C a n O e l i h W s e r u t a e F g n i s U 34 Using the Menu Navigating to a Feature Use these keys to move through the menu system:

Main Menu

) Recent Calls

) Phonebook

)EXIT) SELECT Left Soft Key Perform the function shown in the lower left corner of the display (usually EXIT or BACK). Menu Key Enter the menu system, or open a sub-menu, when M appears in the bottom center of the display. End Key Exit the menu system without making changes, return to the idle display. Right Soft Key Perform the function shown in the lower right corner of the display

(usually SELECT the highlighted menu item). Scroll Keys Scroll up or down through menus and lists.

* and #

Cycle through and set the value of the highlighted menu item. U s i n g t h e M e n u 35 Selecting a Feature Option Some features require you to select an item from a list:

Press BACK (-) to go back to the previous screen. Dialed Calls 10) John Smith 9) Mary Smith BACK M VIEW Highlighted item Press M to open the sub-menu. Press VIEW (+) to view details of the highlighted item. Press S to scroll up or down to highlight the item you want. In a numbered list, press a number key to highlight the item. In an alphabetized list, press a key multiple times to cycle through the letters on the key and highlight the closest matching list item. u n e M e h t g n i s U 36 Entering Feature Information Some features require you to enter information:

Press S to scroll down to additional items. Entry Details Name:John Smith No.:2125551212 CANCEL CHANGE Highlighted item Press CANCEL (-) to exit without making changes. DONE (-) appears when you enter or edit information. Press CHANGE (+) to edit the information. Enter numbers or text with the keypad. When an item has a list of possible values, press

* or # to scroll through and select a value. When an item has a list of possible numeric values, press a number key to set the value. If you enter or edit information and do not want to save your changes, press O to exit without saving. U s i n g t h e M e n u 37 The message center lets you compose and send text messages. A ashing cursor shows where text will appear:

Flashing cursor indicates insertion point. Msg:

Press BROWSE (+) to view and insert a quick note. CANCEL M BROWSE Press CANCEL (-) to exit without making changes. Press M to open the sub-menu. When you enter text using the standard tap method, the ashing cursor changes to a block cursor, and the soft key functions change:

Block cursor indicates current highlighted character. Msg:

T DELETE M OK Press OK (+) to accept and store the text. After two seconds, the block cursor reverts to a ashing cursor and moves to the next position. Press DELETE (-) to delete the character to the left of the insertion point. u n e M e h t g n i s U 38 Entering Text Multiple text entry methods make it easy for you to enter names, numbers, and messages on your phone. Choosing a Text Mode Press M from any text entry screen to select a text mode:

iTAP Let the phone predict each word as you enter it. See page 44. Tap Method Enter letters, numbers, and symbols by pressing a key one or more times. See page 40. Enter numbers only. Enter symbols only. See page 43. Browse your phonebook or recent call lists to select a name or number. Numeric Symbol Browse Note: The text mode you select remains active until you change it by selecting another mode. E n t e r i n g T e x t 39 Using Tap Method This is the standard mode for entering text on your phone. Press M from any text entry screen and select the Tap Method menu option. Do This 1 Press a number key one or more times 2 Continue pressing number keys 3 Press OK (+) To select a letter, number, or symbol shown in the Character Chart on page 42 enter the remaining characters store the text when you are nished t x e T g n i r e t n E 40 General Text Entry Rules Press a number key repeatedly to cycle through its characters. See Character Chart on page 42. Press a number key as many times as necessary to enter the desired character at ashing cursor location. Press and hold a number key to cycle between text entry modes.

)Msg

)CANCEL) BROWSE Change letter in block cursor to uppercase or lowercase. Move ashing cursor to the left or right in text message. If you do not press a key for two seconds, the character in the block cursor is accepted, and the cursor moves to the next position. E n t e r i n g T e x t 41 The rst character of every sentence is capitalized.

(Press S down to force the character to lowercase while it is highlighted by the block cursor). Your phone may support multiple languages. The current language setting determines whether a new message begins on the left or right side of the display. You can switch languages within a message. Press M to select the text mode and language you want to use. Character Chart Use this chart as a guide for entering spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols with the tap method. 1 space . 1 ? ! , @ _ & ~ : ; " -

a b c 2 d e f 3 g h i 4 j k l 5 2 3 4 5 6 m n o 6 p q r s 7 7 t u v 8 q 8 9 w x y z 9 0

+ - 0 x * / \ [ ] = > < #

Note: This chart may not reect the exact character set available on your phone. t x e T g n i r e t n E 42 Using Symbol Mode Your phone provides an alternate way to enter symbol characters in a message. Press M from any text entry screen and select the Symbol menu option. To display its symbol options at the bottom of the display See Symbol Chart on page 43. highlight the symbol you want Do This 1 Press a number key one time 2 Press * or #

or Press the number key multiple times 3 Press SELECT (+) enter the symbol at the ashing cursor location Symbol Chart Use this chart as a guide for entering characters in symbol mode. 1 space . ? ! , @ _ &

2 @ _ \ a

/ : ; d f 3

" & ' g 4 b E n t e r i n g T e x t 43 5 6 7 8 9 0

( ) [ ] { } l

~ w s

< > = p q

# % * x y

+ - x * / = > < #

Using iTAP Software Predictive Text Entry Method iTAP software provides a predictive text entry method that lets you enter a word using one keypress per letter. Press M from any text entry screen and select the iTAP menu option. Enter Words Do This 1 Press a number key one time 2 Press number keys (one per letter) To enter the rst letter of the word The letters associated with the key are shown at the bottom of the display. enter the rest of the word Alternative words and letter combinations are shown at the bottom of the display. The word choices are updated with each keypress. t x e T g n i r e t n E 44 Do This 3 Press * or # highlight the word you want 4 Press To SELECT (+) enter the word at the ashing cursor location A space is automatically inserted after the word. For example, to spell the word act, press 2 2 8. The display shows:

Flashing cursor indicates insertion point. Act Cat Bat Abu }

SELECT DELETE Press S to scroll and see additional word choices. Press DELETE (-) to clear the last letter. Press SELECT (+) to insert the highlighted word. Enter Novel Words You may enter a word that the iTAP software does not recognize. If the word you want is not displayed:

Do This 1 Press DELETE (-) one or more times To delete letters until you see a letter combination that matches the start of the word E n t e r i n g T e x t 45 Do This 2 Press * or # highlight the letter or To letter combination shift the text entry cursor to the left and lock the selected word portion spell the word 3 Press SELECT (+), then press *

4 Continue to enter letters and highlight letter combinations Punctuation Press 0 or 1 To enter punctuation or other characters as shown in the Character Chart on page 42 Capitalization The rst word of a sentence is automatically capitalized, with following words in lowercase. Press S To change the words to initial character capitalized, all uppercase characters, or all lowercase characters t x e T g n i r e t n E 46 Enter Numbers Do This 1 Enter the rst digit and then highlight it To put the iTAP software in number entry mode 2 Press number add digits to the number keys 3 Press SELECT (+) enter the number at the ashing cursor location Delete Letters and Words Place the cursor to the right of the text you want to delete, and then do the following:

Do This Press DELETE (-) Hold DELETE (-) To delete one letter at a time delete the entire message E n t e r i n g T e x t 47 Menu Feature Descriptions This chapter describes all of your phones features in order of the menu map shown on pages 34. Main Menu RECENT CALLS Received Calls M > Recent Calls

> Received Calls View a list of recently received calls. See page 59. Dialed Calls M > Recent Calls

> Dialed Calls View a list of recently dialed calls. See page 59. Notepad M > Recent Calls

> Notepad Call or store the last number entered on the keypad. See page 61. Call Times M > Recent Calls

> Call Times View call timers that track time spent on your last call, dialed calls, received calls, all calls since reset, and all calls total. See page 61. PHONEBOOK M > Phonebook Store names and numbers as entries in your phonebook, then call numbers by selecting them from the phonebook list. See page 64. s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 48 DATEBOOK M > Datebook Use the datebook calendar to schedule and review your appointments. See page 75. QUICK DIAL M > Quick Dial Dial pre-programmed numbers. Your service provider may program your phone with one or more quick dial numbers, such as the customer service number. You can call them by selecting them from the quick dial list. Note: Your service provider may use a different name for this feature. RADIO M > Radio Listen to FM radio stations with the optional Motorola Original FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory. This menu feature is displayed only when the FM Stereo Radio Headset is plugged into the accessory connector port on your phone. See page 80. MESSAGES M > Messages Adjust message settings, view and manage the various types of messages your phone can receive and/or send:

Create Msg Voicemail Create new text messages. See page 91. Listen to your recorded voice messages. See page 83. M e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 49 Text Msgs Quick Notes Outbox Drafts Read and manage text messages. See page 85. Select and send pre-written messages from the quick notes list. See page 93. View all outgoing text messages, delivered and undelivered. Store and edit text messages that you have written but not sent. RING STYLES Style M > Ring Styles

> Style Select the ring style your phone uses to notify you of incoming calls, messages, or other events. See page 95. Style Detail M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail Change details about the current ring style. Style represents the name of the ring style. See page 95. My Tones M > Ring Styles

> My Tones Create custom alert tones for your phone. See page 97. SHORTCUTS M > Shortcuts Create keypad or voice shortcuts to menu features. See page 105. s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 50 VOICE NOTES M > Voice Notes Use the voice key to record messages and phone calls. See page 108. Note: Recording phone calls is subject to varying state and federal laws regarding privacy and recording of conversations. BROWSER M > Browser Access Web pages and run Web-based applications. The micro-browser delivers WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) pages from your service provider directly to your phone. See page 114. CALCULATOR M > Calculator Use your phone as a calculator or currency converter. See page 116. GAMES M > Games Play games on your phone. See page 119. Settings Menu PHONE STATUS My Tel. Number M > Settings

> Phone Status

> My Tel. Number View, enter, and edit information about your name and phone number. M e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 51 Active Line M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Active Line Change the active phone line to send and receive calls from either of the available numbers. Battery Meter M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Battery Meter View a detailed battery charge meter. Other Information M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Other Information View your phones feature specications

(if available from the service provider). CONNECTION Connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device to send and receive data calls on the connected device. See page 131. Incoming Call M > Settings

> Connection

> Incoming Call Specify the format for the next incoming call. You can select Data In Only or Normal. See page 135. IN-CALL SETUP Set the features that are active during a call, such as the in-call timer and call answering options. s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 52 In-Call Timer M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> In-Call Timer Adjust call timer Display and Beep settings. You can set your timer to beep at a selected interval during your calls. (60 seconds is the default.) You can also turn on or off a display timer during calls as follows:

Time Display the elapsed time for the current call. No in-call timer display. Off Answer Options M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> Answer Options Turn call answering options on or off:

Multi-Key Answer by pressing any key. SECURITY Phone Lock M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock Lock and unlock your phone. See page 139. Lock Keypad M > Settings > Security

> Lock Keypad View instructions on how to lock and unlock your keypad. See page 140. Lock Application M > Settings > Security

> Lock Application Lock and unlock specic phone applications

(such as phonebook or datebook). When an application is locked, users must enter the unlock code to use the application. M e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 53 Talk Secure M > Settings > Security

> Talk Secure Activate a secure connection to prevent others from intercepting your calls. See pages 28 and 142. Restrict Calls M > Settings > Security

> Restrict Calls Restrict incoming and outgoing calls. See page 140. New Passwords M > Settings > Security

> New Passwords Change your unlock code (originally set to 1234) or your security code (originally set to 000000). See page 137. OTHER SETTINGS Personalize M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Personalize Set several personal phone options:

Main Menu Keys Greeting Change the order of the main menu. See page 124. Change the functions of the soft keys in the idle display. See page 124. Change the text displayed when you turn on your phone. s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 54 Quick Dial Change quick dial number(s). Initial Setup M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup Set many basic phone options:

Time and Date Backlight Zoom TTY Setup Scroll Set the phones time and date. Set the amount of time that the display backlight remains on, or turn off the backlight to conserve battery power. Switch between three lines

(Zoom Out) and two lines

(Zoom In) of display text. Set your phone to operate in one of three TTY modes, or return to normal Voice mode. See page 125. Force the cursor to stop or wrap around when it reaches the top or bottom of a list in the display. M e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 55 Animation Language Battery Save Contrast DTMF Master Reset Turn animation off (to conserve battery power) or on. Animation makes your phones menus move smoothly as you scroll up and down. Set the language for phone menus. Adjust the phones power usage characteristics to conserve power. Adjust the contrast setting for your display. Your phone can send a number to the network as dual tone multi-frequency

(DTMF) tones. DTMF tones are used to communicate with automated systems that require you to enter a number such as a code, password, or credit card number. Use this option to set DTMF tones on or off. Reset all options back to their original factory settings except for the unlock code, security code, and lifetime timer. s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 56 Master Clear Network Reset all options back to their original factory settings except for the unlock code, security code, and lifetime timer, and clear all user settings and entries. Note: This option erases all user-entered information stored in your phones memory, including phonebook and datebook entries. Once you erase the information, it cannot be recovered. M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Network View and adjust your phones network settings. Your service provider registers your phone to a network. You can view information about the current network, change how your phone searches for a network, and activate alerts that indicate when a call is dropped or network registration changes. Car Settings M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Car Settings Adjust hands-free car kit settings. You can set your phone to route calls directly to the car kit when it detects a connection, and M e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 57 automatically answer calls after two rings. See page 127. Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the laws and regulations on the use of these products. Headset M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Headset Set your phone to automatically answer calls after two rings when connected to a headset. See page 127. s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 58 Recent Calls Viewing Received Calls or Dialed Calls Your phone keeps a list of the calls you recently received and dialed, even if the calls did not connect. The lists are sorted from newest to oldest entries. The oldest entries are deleted as new ones are added. Shortcut: Press N to go directly to the dialed calls list from the idle display. Find the Feature M > Recent Calls R e c e n t C a l l s Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) 3 S To scroll to Received Calls or Dialed Calls select the list scroll to an entry Note: < means the call connected. 59 Press 4 N or To call the entrys number VIEW (+) view entry details or M open the Last Calls Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list The Last Calls Menu includes the following options:

Option Store Delete Delete All Send Message Description Create a phonebook entry with the number in the No. eld. Delete the entry. Delete all entries in the list. Open a new text message with the number in the To eld. Add digits after the number. Add Digits Attach Number Attach a number from the Send Tones phonebook or recent call lists, after the highlighted number. Send the number to the network as DTMF tones, for credit card or password calls. s l l a C t n e c e R 60 Using the Notepad Your phone stores the most recent string of digits entered on the keypad in a temporary memory location called the notepad. This can be a phone number that you called, or a number that you entered but did not call. To retrieve the number stored in the notepad:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls

> Notepad Press N or M or STORE (+) To call the number open the Dialing Menu to attach a number or insert a special character create a phonebook entry with the number in the No. eld Viewing and Resetting Call Timers Network connection time is the elapsed time from the moment you connect to your service provider's network to the moment you end the call by pressing O. This time includes busy signals and ringing. R e c e n t C a l l s 61 The amount of network connection time you track on your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time for which you are billed by your service provider. For billing information, please contact your service provider directly. You can view the following network connection times:

Timer Last Call Dialed Calls Description Time spent on last dialed or received call. You cannot reset this timer. Time spent on dialed calls since the last time you reset this timer. Received Calls Time spent on received calls All Calls Lifetime since the last time you reset this timer. Time spent on dialed and received calls since the last time you reset this timer. Time spent on all calls on this phone. You cannot reset this timer. s l l a C t n e c e R 62 To view a call timer:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls

> Call Times Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to the timer you want\

view the recorded time To reset the call timer:

Press 1 RESET (+) 2 YES (-) To reset the time (if available) conrm the reset R e c e n t C a l l s 63 Phonebook You can store a list of names and phone numbers or email addresses in your phones electronic phonebook. To see the names in your phonebook, press M > Phonebook from the idle display. Scroll to a name and press VIEW (+) to view details of the phonebook entry as shown below. Viewing Entry Details Type indicator identies number type:

$ Work U Home S Main h Mobile Z Fax p Pager

[ Email

$*Carlo Emrys 2154337215 Speed No.15 M Voice Name indicator indicates a recorded voice name Entrys phone number or email address Entrys speed dial number Entrys Name BACK EDIT Return to list Press M to open the Phonebook Menu Edit entry Note: When you set a distinctive ringer alert for an entry, the Ringer ID setting appears below the speed dial number. k o o b e n o h P 64 Storing a Phonebook Entry A phone number or email address is required for a phonebook entry. All other information is optional. Shortcut: Enter a phone number in the idle display, then press STORE (+) to create a phonebook entry with the number in the No. eld. Go directly to step 3 to continue. Enter Information Find the Feature M > Phonebook M > New Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) 3 CHANGE (+) 4 keypad keys 5 OK (+) 6 CHANGE (+) 7 keypad keys 8 OK (+) To scroll to Phone Number or Email Address select the entry type select Name enter a name for the entry store the name select No. or Email enter the phone number or email address Tip: You can store a PIN code with the phone number. See page 67. store the phone number or email address P h o n e b o o k 65 Press 9 CHANGE (+) 10 S 11 SELECT (+) 12 RECORD (+) or Go to step 13 if you do not want a voice name 13 S 14 CHANGE (+) 15 keypad keys 16 OK (+) 17 CHANGE (+) To select Type Note: This option is not available for email entries. scroll to the number type select the number type record a voice name for the entry, if desired (see page 69) scroll to Speed No. The next available speed dial number is assigned to a new phonebook entry. select Speed No. if you want to change it enter a different speed dial number, if desired store the speed dial number select Ringer ID if you want to assign a distinctive ringer alert for the phone number Your phone uses the alert to notify you when you receive a call from this phone number. See page 96. k o o b e n o h P 66 Press 18 S 19 SELECT (+) 20 SELECT (+) To scroll to the alert you want store the ringer ID alert select MORE if you want to create another entry under the same Name You must use a different Type identier for each number. Complete Phonebook Entry When you are nished entering information for a phonebook entry:

Press DONE (-) To store the entry Storing a PIN Code With the Phone Number You can store a PIN code with the phone number for calls that require additional digits (for example, to make a calling card call, or to retrieve voicemail or answering machine messages). Insert one or more of the following characters P h o n e b o o k 67 in the dialing sequence to ensure that the number dials and connects properly:

Press M > Insert Pause M > Insert Wait M > Insert n To insert a p (pause) character Your phone dials the preceding digits, waits for the call to connect, then sends the remaining digit(s). insert a w (wait) character Your phone dials the preceding digits, waits for the call to connect, then prompts you for conrmation before it sends the remaining digit(s). insert an n (number) character Your phone prompts you for a number before dialing the call. The number you enter is inserted into the dialing sequence in place of the n character Note: You can store a maximum of 32 digits per number. Each character counts as one digit. k o o b e n o h P 68 Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry You can record a voice name for a new or existing phonebook entry. A voice name lets you call the phonebook entry using voice dial (see page 70). Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. Find the Feature M > Phonebook Do This 1 Press S 2 Press VIEW (+) 3 Press EDIT (+) 4 Press S 5 Press RECORD (+) 6 Press and release the voice key and say the entrys name (in two seconds) 7 Press and release the voice key and repeat the name 8 Press DONE (-) To scroll to the entry view entry details edit the entry scroll to Voice Name begin recording record the voice name conrm the voice name store the voice name P h o n e b o o k 69 Dialing a Phonebook Entry Use one of the following procedures to call a number (or send a text message to an email address) stored in your phonebook. Phonebook List Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 keypad key letter 2 S 3 N Voice Dial To jump to entries that begin with that letter (optional) scroll to the entry make the call To make the call Do This Press and release the voice key and say the entrys name

(in two seconds). To speed dial a phonebook entry, see page 31. To call an entry with one-touch dial, see page 31. k o o b e n o h P 70 Editing a Phonebook Entry Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 S 2 VIEW (+) 3 EDIT (+) To scroll to the entry view entry details edit the entry Edit the entry as described on pages 65-67. Deleting a Phonebook Entry Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) 5 YES (-) To scroll to the entry open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Delete select Delete conrm the deletion Setting the Primary Number for a Phonebook Entry When you enter multiple phone numbers for the same name, you can set one as the primary number. Find the Feature M > Phonebook P h o n e b o o k 71 Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) 5 S 6 SELECT (+) To scroll to the entry open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Set Primary select Set Primary scroll to the number you want to set as the primary number set the primary number Depending on how the phonebook list is sorted, the primary number is listed rst, or is the only number that appears for a phonebook entry. See page 73. Checking Phonebook Capacity You can see how much memory space remains for storing phonebook and datebook entries on your phone. k o o b e n o h P Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) To open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Ph Book Capacity select Ph Book Capacity Your phone displays the phone memory meter. 72 Sorting the Phonebook List You can sort your phonebook list by speed dial number

(the standard), name, email address, or voice name. Note: The voice name sort is identical to the name sort, except that entries with voice name tags appear rst. Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) 4 S 5 CHANGE (+) 6 S 7 SELECT (+) To open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Setup select Setup scroll to Sort by select Sort by scroll to Name, Speed No., Voice Name, or Email select the sort order If you select Speed No., Voice Name, or Email, the procedure is complete. If you select Name, you must specify whether you want to view all numbers or just the primary number for each name:

Press 8 CHANGE (+) 9 S To change view preference scroll to Primary Contacts or All Contacts P h o n e b o o k 73 Press 10 SELECT (+) 11 DONE (-) To select the view preference set the view preference To set an entrys primary phone number, see page 71. Tip: When the phonebook list displays primary numbers only, you can scroll to a name and press * or # to view other numbers associated with the name. k o o b e n o h P 74 Datebook The datebook is a calendar that lets you schedule and organize events such as appointments and meetings. You can set the datebook to send a reminder alarm for specic events. Note: You must set the correct time and date on your phone to use the datebook. To schedule or review datebook events:

Find the Feature M > Datebook Week View The datebook initially displays a calendar for the week. Lines or lled boxes indicate scheduled events. Untimed event 12 hour window Exit the datebook

{ 15 NOV-21 NOV

S M T W T F S EXIT M VIEW Days of week

(press * or #

to select) One-hour event Go to selected day Full day (12-hour) event scheduled Press M to open the Datebook Menu D a t e b o o k 75 Day View Select a day and press VIEW (+) to see the days events. Untimed event Down scroll arrow

{ THU 19-NOV Joes B-day

9:00 A Marie,... VIEW M BACK Return to previous screen Press M to open the Datebook Menu Day of week Reminder alarm Event Show event details Event View Select an event and press VIEW (+) to see event details. Reminder alarm Down scroll arrow A THU 9:00am Marie, mtg about new product M BACK EDIT Return to previous screen Press M to open the Datebook Menu Day and time Event details Edit event k o o b e t a D 76 Adding a Datebook Event A title is required for a datebook event. All other information is optional. Note: You must create an event to use the reminder alarm. Find the Feature M > Datebook > day M > New Press 1 CHANGE (+) 2 keypad keys 3 OK (+) 4 S 5 DONE (-) To select Title enter a title for the event store the event title scroll to other elds and enter information as necessary You can set start time, duration, date, repeat interval, and reminder alarm. store the event Changing Event Information Find the Feature M > Datebook Press 1 * or #

2 VIEW (+) 3 S 4 VIEW (+) 5 EDIT (+) To scroll to the day display the day view scroll to the event display the event view edit the event D a t e b o o k 77 Press 6 S 7 CHANGE (+) 8 keypad keys 9 DONE (-) To scroll to the information you want to change edit the information enter new information store the information Copying an Event Find the Feature M > Datebook Press 1 * or #

2 VIEW (+) 3 S 4 M 5 S 6 SELECT (+) 7 YES (-) 8 keypad keys 9 } (+) 10 DONE (-) 11 S To scroll to the day display the day view scroll to the event open the Datebook Menu scroll to Copy copy the event conrm the copy Your phone assumes you want to change the date, and displays the Date eld. enter date information move to month, day, and year save the copy of the event scroll to and edit event information, if necessary k o o b e t a D 78 Press 12 DONE (-) To store the information Deleting an Event Find the Feature M > Datebook Press 1 * or #

2 VIEW (+) 3 S 4 M 5 S 6 SELECT (+) 7 YES (-) To scroll to the day display the day view scroll to the event open the Datebook Menu scroll to Delete select Delete conrm the deletion D a t e b o o k 79 Radio You can use your phone to listen to FM radio stations when the optional Motorola Original FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory is plugged into the phones accessory connector port. Turning the Radio On and Off Press Radio (+) To turn the radio on and off Alternatively, you can use the following procedure:

Press 1 M 2 S 3 On (+) or Off (+) To open the menu scroll to Radio turn the radio on or off Note: The Radio menu feature and soft key options appear only when the FM Stereo Radio Headset is plugged into the accessory connector port. o i d a R 80 Tuning a Station Do This Press S To scroll to the next frequency or Press and hold S scroll to the next available stereo station Storing a Preset Do This Press and hold a number key

(1 to 9) To assign its preset number to the tuned station Selecting a Preset Press a number key

(1 to 9) To tune the station stored at the preset location Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On Your phone rings or vibrates as usual to notify you of an incoming call, message, or other event. R a d i o 81 Do This Press IGNORE (-) Press ANSWER (+) or Press the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone To ignore the call answer the call Note: You can use the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to converse with the other party during a call To end the call and resume the FM broadcast:

To end the call Do This Press O or Press and hold the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone Turn the radio off before dialing outgoing calls from the phone keypad. You do not have to turn off the radio to dial emergency numbers, or numbers selected from your phonebook or recent call lists. Tip: To dial a recently called number, press N or the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to go to the dialed calls list. For more information, see page 59. o i d a R 82 MessagesVoicemail You can listen to your voicemail messages by calling your network voicemail phone number. Voicemail messages are stored on the networknot on your phone. Storing Your Voicemail Number Storing your voicemail number on your phone makes it easy for you to listen to new voicemail messages. In many cases, your service provider has already done this for you. Find the Feature M > Messages M > VoiceMail Setup Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) To enter your voicemail number Tip: You can store your PIN code with the voicemail number. See page 67. store the number Your service provider additionally may store your voicemail number as phonebook entry number 1, so you can use one-touch dial to listen to your voicemail messages. If necessary, see page 65 to store your voicemail number for one-touch dial access. M e s s a g e s V o i c e m a i l 83 Receiving a Voicemail Message When you receive a voicemail message, your phone displays the & (voice message waiting) indicator and a New VoiceMail notication. Press CALL (+) To listen to the message If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder at regular intervals until you close the new message notication, listen to the message, or turn off your phone. Listening to a Voicemail Message Find the Feature M > Messages > VoiceMail The phone calls your voicemail number. If no voicemail number is stored, your phone prompts you to store one. Shortcut: If your voicemail number is also stored as phonebook entry number 1, you can press and hold 1 to listen to your voicemail message(s). l i a m e c i o V s e g a s s e M 84 MessagesText Text messages are brief messages that you can send and receive. Quick notes are pre-written text messages that you can incorporate into a message and send quickly. Your text message inbox must be set up before you can send and receive messages. The number of messages the inbox can hold depends on the length of the messages, and the number of other messages and drafts stored on your phone. Setting Up the Text Message Inbox Note: In many cases, your service provider has already set up the text message inbox for you. Find the Feature M > Messages M > Text Msg Setup Press 1 CHANGE (+) 2 keypad keys 3 OK (+) To change the Srvce Center No. enter the phone number for the service that handles your outgoing messages store the number M e s s a g e s T e x t 85 Press 4 CHANGE (+) 5 keypad keys 6 OK (+) 7 CHANGE (+) 8 S 9 SELECT (+) 10 CHANGE (+) 11 S 12 SELECT (+) 13 DONE (-) To change the Expire After period enter the expiration period the number of days your network tries to send unreceived messages store the expiration period change the Cleanup setting scroll to the number of days you want to keep messages in the inbox, or the number of messages you want to keep select the cleanup setting change the SMS Alert setting select whether you want incoming message alerts turned On or Off while you are on a voice call select the SMS Alert setting save the inbox settings Receiving a Text Message Note: Your text message inbox must be set up before you can receive text messages. See page 85. t x e T s e g a s s e M 86 When you receive a text message, your phone displays the X (message waiting) indicator and a New Message notication, and gives an alert. Press READ (+) To open the message If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder at regular intervals until you close the new message notication, read the message, or turn off your phone. When your phone displays Memory is Full!, you must delete some existing messages to receive new messages. Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message Messages in the text message inbox are sorted from newest to oldest. The oldest messages are deleted automatically as specied by the inbox cleanup setting

(see page 85). If you want to save a message, you should lock it to prevent it from being deleted during cleanup. Find the Feature M > Messages

> Text Msgs M e s s a g e s T e x t 87 Press 1 S 2 READ (+) 3 BACK (-) or To scroll to the message The following indicators show message status:

Y = unread

=unread (with attachment) d = unread and urgent

= unread and urgent

(with attachment) n = read

= read (with attachment)

= read and urgent f = read and locked

= read and locked

(with attachment) open the message close the message DELETE (+) delete the message or M open the Text Msg Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list t x e T s e g a s s e M 88 Press 4 SAVE (-) To close the message or REPLY (+) or M compose and send a reply open the Text Msg Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list The Text Msg Menu includes the following options:

Option Delete Call Back Go To Forward Store Tone Play Lock/Unlock Description Delete the message. Call the number in the message header or embedded in the message. Launch the micro-browser and go to a Web address (URL) embedded in the message. Open a copy of the text message, with an empty To eld. Note: You cannot forward sound les embedded in a text message. Only the text is forwarded. Store the selected sound le. Play a sound le in the message. Lock or unlock the message. M e s s a g e s T e x t 89 Option Store Number Description Create a phonebook entry, with the embedded number in the No. eld. Delete All Delete all inbox messages. Create Message Open a new text message. Store Address Create a phonebook entry, with the embedded email address in the Email eld. Open the text message inbox setup menu. Setup Storing Sounds Text messages that you receive can contain sounds. A sound begins playing when you scroll to or select the

(sound le) indicator in the message. You can store these embedded sound les on your phone, and use them as alert tones. Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) To open the Text Msg Menu scroll to Store Tone select the option Your phone adds the sound to the My Tones list. For more information about using sound les, see pages 95 and 97. t x e T s e g a s s e M 90 Sending a Text Message You can send a text message to one or more recipients. You can manually enter each recipients phone number or email address, or select numbers/

addresses from the phonebook or recent call lists. Note: When you manually enter numbers and/or email addresses, you must insert a space between each entry. Press and hold 1 until the space appears, then enter the next number or email address. Find the Feature M > Messages

> Create Message Press 1 CHANGE (+) 2 keypad keys or BROWSE (+) 3 OK (+) 4 CHANGE (+) To select To enter one or more phone numbers and/or email addresses Tip: Press 1 to insert a space between each number/address that you enter manually. select numbers/addresses from the phonebook or recent call lists store the numbers/addresses select Msg M e s s a g e s T e x t 91 Press 5 keypad keys or BROWSE (+) 6 OK (+) 7 CHANGE (+) 8 S 9 SELECT (+) 10 CHANGE (+) 11 keypad keys 12 OK (+) 13 CHANGE (+) 14 S 15 OK (+) 16 DONE (-) To enter the message Note: Message length is limited.As you near the limit, a display counter shows how many characters are left. select and insert a quick note message (see page 93) store the message select Priority scroll to the priority you want set the priority select Call enter a number for the recipient to call back store the number select Receipt select whether you want the message status to be updated when the recipient opens the message Note: Sent messages are stored in your outbox. See page 94. store your receipt preference nish the message t x e T s e g a s s e M 92 Press 17 YES (-) or NO (+) To send the message cancel the message or save it in the drafts folder Sending a Quick Note Text Message Quick notes are pre-written text messages that you can incorporate into a message and send quickly (for example, Meet me at ...). You can also create new quick notes. Find the Feature M > Messages

> Quick Notes M e s s a g e s T e x t Press 1 S 2 READ (+) or M To scroll to the quick note read the quick note open the Quick Note Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list The Quick Note Menu includes the following options:

Option New Edit Description Create a new quick note. Edit the quick note. 93 Option Delete Send Description Delete the quick note. Open a new message with the quick note in the Msg eld. Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages Messages that you send are stored in the outbox. Find the Feature M > Messages > Outbox Messages in the outbox are sorted from newest to oldest. The following indicators show message status:

t x e T s e g a s s e M

= sending in progress Y = sent m = sending failed n = read by recipient 94 Ring Styles Your phone rings or vibrates to notify you of an incoming call or other event. This ring or vibration is called an alert. You can select one of ve different ring styles:

w = loud ring y = vibrate t = silent x = soft ring u = vibrate and ring The ring style indicator in the display shows the current ring style (see page 23). Each ring style contains settings for specic event alerts, ringer ID, and ringer and keypad volume. Selecting a Ring Style Find the Feature M > Ring Styles > Style Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to the ring style select the ring style Customizing a Ring Style Change Style Settings You can change the alerts that notify you of the following events: incoming calls, text messages, voicemail R i n g S t y l e s 95 messages, data calls, fax calls, alarms, and reminders. Any changes you make are saved to the current ring style. Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail Note: Style represents the current ring style. Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 SELECT (+) To scroll to the event select the event scroll to the alert you want select the alert s e l y t S g n i R Activate and Deactivate Ringer IDs When ringer IDs are turned on, your phone uses distinctive ringer alerts to notify you of incoming calls or messages from specic entries stored in your phonebook. To assign a ringer ID to a phonebook entry, see page 65. Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail Note: Style represents the current ring style. Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 SELECT (+) To scroll to Ringer IDs change the ringer IDs setting scroll to On or Off select the option 96 Set Ringer or Keypad Volume Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail Note: Style represents the current ring style. Press 1 S 2 * or #

3 OK (+) To scroll to Ring Volume or Key Volume scroll to the desired volume conrm the new volume Creating Alert Tones You can create and store up to 32 custom alert tones on your phone. The tones appear in the list of available alerts. Create a Tone Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> My Tones R i n g S t y l e s Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) 3 CHANGE (+) 4 keypad keys 5 OK (+) 6 CHANGE (+) 7 keypad keys To scroll to [New Tone]

select [New Tone]

select Notes enter notes (see) store the notes select Name enter a name for the tone 97 Press 8 OK (+) 9 DONE (-) To store the name store the tone Enter Notes To create a new tone, use the keypad keys to enter notes. For each note, you must specify the octave (optional), pitch, length, and a length modier (optional). Press a key multiple times to cycle through its available options and enter the necessary character as described in the following lists. Octave The default setting for a new tone is octave four. Key 0 Display

Description enter * followed by a number

(0 to 8) to set the octave Notes and Rests Key 0 2 Display

a b c Description sharp at note A note B note C s e l y t S g n i R 98 Key 3 4 7 Display d e f g r Description note D note E note F note G rest Lengths and Modiers Key 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 Display 0 1 2 3 4 5

Description whole note half note quarter note eighth note sixteenth note 1/32 note dotted note double dotted note 2/3 length note Volume Control Characters Key 8 Display V, +, and -

Description Set volume level from V1 to V15. Enter V+ or V- to increase or decrease volume one level from current setting. R i n g S t y l e s 99 Repeat Characters Key 9 Display

(, ), and @ Use parentheses to enclose Description sequence of notes to be repeated. After the sequence, enter @ followed by digit(s) to set number of repetitions. Note Entry Sequence Do This 1 Set the octave

(optional) 2 Set the note to a sharp or at, if necessary Action Set the octave (*0 to *8) before selecting the note. The octave applies to the note and all following notes until you change it again. Enter a sharp or at (# or &) before selecting the note. 3 Select the note Press a keypad key.

(required) 4 Set length

(required) 5 Modify length

(optional) Set the length (0 to 5) after selecting the note. If you you do not specify a length, a 2

(quarter note) length is appended to the note. Enter a length modier (. , :, or ;) after you set the length. s e l y t S g n i R 100 You can perform the following tasks when creating a tone:

Task Insert a rest Repeat a note sequence Adjust volume Listen to a new tone as you compose it Action Enter one or more rests

(r characters) as needed in the tone sequence. Set the length of the rest (0 to 5) after the rest, just as you would for a note. Use ( and ) to group a sequence of notes. After the sequence, enter @ followed by a number to set the number of repetitions. Enter V+ or V- to increase or decrease volume one level at the current location in the note sequence. Press M to enter the Compose Menu, and select Play All to play the notes you have entered. Example Press the following keys to create this sequence of notes and rests in octave three: C (quarter note), E at (quarter note), half rest, and G (whole note):

Press 1 0 0 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 To set octave three enter note C Display

*3 c R i n g S t y l e s 101 Press 3 2 2 2 2 set length to quarter note To 4 0 0 0 0 enter at 5 3 3 symbol enter note E at 7 7 8 1 6 2 2 2 2 set length to quarter note enter rest set length to half rest enter note G set length to whole note 9 4 10 0 Display 2

e 2 r 1 g 0 Play a Tone Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> My Tones Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) To scroll to the tone open the My Tones Menu scroll to Play select Play s e l y t S g n i R 102 Press 5 PLAY (+) or To play the tone again CANCEL (-) return to my tones list Edit a Tone You cannot edit the predened alert tones included with your phone. To edit a custom alert tone:

Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> My Tones Press 1 S 2 EDIT (+) 3 S 4 CHANGE (+) 5 keypad keys 6 OK (+) 7 DONE (-) To scroll to the tone open the tone details scroll to the item you want to edit (Name or Notes) select the item enter new text or notes store the new text or notes save your changes Delete a Tone You cannot delete the predened alert tones included with your phone. To delete a custom alert tone:

Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> My Tones R i n g S t y l e s 103 Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) 5 YES (-) To scroll to the tone open the My Tones Menu scroll to Delete select Delete conrm the deletion Download a Tone You can download custom alert tones from a text message. See page 90. Setting Reminders A reminder is an alert that rings or vibrates at regular intervals to notify you about a voicemail or text message that you have received. s e l y t S g n i R Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail

> Reminders Note: Style represents the current ring style. Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to Beep or Vibrate to set the reminder alert type, or Off to turn off all reminders select the reminder alert 104 Shortcuts Your phone includes several standard shortcuts. You can create additional shortcuts to frequently used menu items. Standard Shortcuts The following shortcuts are pre-programmed in your phone. You cannot edit or delete these shortcuts. Do This Press M, then press and hold M

(within two seconds) Press M *

Press M #

Press N Press O To zoom in/out on your phone display lock/unlock your keypad see your phone number go to the dialed calls list exit the menu system Creating a Shortcut You can create a keypad shortcut plus an optional voice shortcut to a menu item. A voice shortcut takes you directly to the menu item when you say the shortcut name. Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. Do This 1 Press M To enter the menu system S h o r t c u t s 105 Do This To 2 Press S scroll to the menu item 3 Press and hold M open the shortcut editor 4 Press YES (-) 5 Press CHANGE (+) view shortcut options change the keypad shortcut number or Press DONE (-) or Press S 6 Press RECORD (+) 7 Press and release the voice key and say the shortcuts name

(in two seconds) 8 Press and release the voice key and repeat the name 9 Press DONE (-) select the default keypad shortcut number scroll to Voice to assign a voice shortcut begin recording record the shortcut name conrm the shortcut name store the shortcut name s t u c t r o h S 106 Using Shortcuts Use a Keypad Shortcut Press 1 M 2 the keypad shortcut number To open the menu go to the menu item or perform the menu action Select a Shortcut From the List Find the Feature M > Shortcuts

> the shortcut you want Use a Voice Shortcut Do This 1 Press M 2 Press and release the voice key and say the shortcuts name

(in two seconds) To open the menu go to the menu item or perform the menu action S h o r t c u t s 107 Voice Notes You can use the voice note feature to record personal messages and phone calls on your phone. Recording a Voice Note Use this procedure to record a voice note from the idle display, or to record a phone call in progress. Your phone plays an alert tone to notify the other party that the call is being recorded. Note: Recording phone calls is subject to varying state and federal laws regarding privacy and recording of conversations. Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. Do This 1 Press and hold the voice key for the duration of the recording. Result The phone sounds an alert tone and begins recording. 2 Speak your voice note. The phone records the 3 Release the voice key to stop recording. voice note. The phone displays the voice note number and total recording time. s e t o N e c i o V 108 Viewing the Voice Notes List Find the Feature M > Voice Notes Locked voice note Down scroll arrow f Voice Notes 2)2:20pm 6/1/00 1)4:05am 4/1/00 EXIT M PLAY Time/date recorded Play the highlighted voice note Return to previous screen Press M to open the Voice Notes Menu V o i c e N o t e s 109 Playing a Voice Note Find the Feature M > Voice Notes Press 1 S 2 PLAY (+) To scroll to the voice note play the voice note When you connect an optional Motorola Original headset or FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory to your phone, playback is automatically routed to the headset. Tip: You can play a voice note while taking a call. It will not be transmitted to the other party. Playback Screen The playback screen is displayed as the voice note plays. Indicates

% played Press *

to rewind Return to previous screen Voice Note 3

SAVE M DELETE Voice note number Press # to fast forward Press M to open the Voice Notes Menu Erase voice note s e t o N e c i o V 110 Voice Note Controls Stop playback and go to Voice Notes Menu. Raise or lower playback volume of voice note. Stop playback and return to voice notes list. Stop playback and scroll up/down to next voice note. Rewind three seconds, resume playing. Press and hold to rewind to the beginning. When playback is complete, press to restart. If voice note is unlocked, stop playback and display Delete Voice Note?

If voice note is locked, stop playback and unlock voice note. Press any number to alternately stop and start playback. Fast forward three seconds, resume playing. Press and hold to fast forward to end. V o i c e N o t e s 111 Locking and Unlocking a Voice Note Lock a voice note to prevent it from being deleted. You must unlock a voice note to delete it. Find the Feature M > Voice Notes Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) To scroll to the voice note open the Voice Notes Menu scroll to Lock or Unlock lock or unlock the voice note To lock or unlock a voice note during playback:

Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) To open the Voice Notes Menu scroll to Lock or Unlock lock or unlock the voice note Playback stops when you lock or unlock a voice note. Press any number key to resume playback. s e t o N e c i o V 112 Deleting a Voice Note Find the Feature M > Voice Notes Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) 5 YES (-) or NO (+) Notes:

To scroll to the voice note you want to delete open the Voice Notes Menu scroll to Delete or Delete All select the highlighted option conrm the deletion cancel deletion You cannot delete a locked voice note. You cannot recover a delete voice note. V o i c e N o t e s 113 Micro-Browser The micro-browser lets you access Web pages and Web-based applications on your phone. Contact your service provider to set up access, if necessary. Starting a Micro-Browser Session Find the Feature M > Browser Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to a bookmark, service, or application select the item If you are unable to establish a network connection with the micro-browser, contact your service provider. r e s w o r B

o r c i M 114 Interacting With Web Pages Press S SELECT (+) N keypad keys, followed by OK (+)

M To scroll through text, or highlight a selectable item select the highlighted item call the highlighted phone number from the micro-browser enter information Press * to delete one letter at a time if you make a mistake. go back to the previous page open the Browser Menu M i c r o

B r o w s e r 115 Calculator You can use your phone as a calculator and currency converter. Calculating Numbers r o t a l u c l a C Press 1 number keys 2 * or #

3 SELECT (+) To enter a number highlight a calculator function perform the function Calculator

. EXIT C = + - x M 0

SELECT Press M to open the Calculator Menu Entered number Press * or

# to scroll to other functions Perform the highlighted function Selected function appears here Press * or

# to highlight a function Exit the calculator 116 The calculator can perform the following functions:

Function

. C CE

x

MS MC MR Description Insert a decimal point Clear the calculation Clear entry (replaces C when you enter subsequent values in a calculation) Calculate the result Add Subtract Multiply Divide Divide the displayed value by 100 Change the entrys sign

(positive/negative) Calculate the exchange rate Store the value in memory (overwrites current stored value) Clear the value stored in memory Replace the displayed value with the value stored in memory C a l c u l a t o r 117 Converting Currency The currency converter works just like the calculator, but uses the $ (currency) function:

Find the Feature M > Calculator M > Exchange Rate Press 1 number keys 2 OK (+) 3 number keys 4 * or #

5 SELECT (+) To enter the exchange rate store the exchange rate enter the amount to convert

(amount to multiply by the exchange rate) highlight the $ function perform the conversion r o t a l u c l a C 118 Games You can play games on your phone between phone calls. An incoming call, message, alarm, or alert automatically ends the game. Playing a Game Find the Feature M > Games Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to a game start the game When the game is over:

Press NEW (+) or YES (+) BACK (-) or NO (-) To start another session of the same game end the game session 7 A A G a m e s 119 Game Options Press M to select the following options during a game. Note: Some options may not be available for all games. Option Game Sounds New Game Help Description Switch game sounds on/off. Start a new game session. Review the goal of the game. Blackjack In this classic card game, you play against the dealer to see who can get closer to 21 points without going over. Rules of the Game The rst card is dealt to the dealer. The dealers cards are shown at the top of the display, and your cards are shown at the bottom. Face cards count as 10 points. Number cards count as the points shown on their face. An ace counts as 11 points, unless that would put you over 21 points. Otherwise, an ace is counted as 1 point. An ace that is originally counted as 11 may later be counted as 1 if it will bring your total under or equal to 21 points. An initial deal of an ace and a card with a face value of 10 points counts as exactly 21 points or Blackjack. 7 A A s e m a G 120 Blackjack automatically wins against any other hand that totals 21 points. If you score more than 21 points, you go bust or lose. If you get ve cards without going bust, you win. If you and the dealer have the same score, the dealer wins. You can ask for a hit or another card as long as you do not go bust. As long as the dealers total is less than 17 points, the dealer must continue to take a hit. 7 A A How to Play When the game begins, you are dealt two cards. Press STAY (-) HIT ME (+) To see the results of the hand request another card Falling Numbers Score points by pressing the corresponding number key for numbers as they fall down the display. Rules of the Game If a number reaches the bottom of the display or if you press an incorrect number key, you score one miss. The game is over when you score three misses. G a m e s 121 The game has ve levels. When you complete a level, play continues automatically at the next level. You earn a bonus if you nish a level without a miss. How to Play When the game begins, numbers start falling from the upper portion of the display. Press the corresponding number key to eliminate a falling number before it reaches the bottom of the display. A Press M to select the following options:

Option Level Top Scores Description Choose the starting level of play. View the top ve scores. Video Poker Turn 100 credits into 9,999-plus credits by making the best possible poker hands. Rules of the Game You start a new game with 100 credits. You must bet from 1-10 credits for each hand you play. You are dealt ve cards face up, and have one opportunity to trade in cards (zero to ve) for new ones. A winning hand earns credits as listed in the Awards Table. 7 A s e m a G 122 Your credit total is saved when you exit the game. The next time you play, you start with the number of credits that remain from the previous session. The game is over when you lose all of your credits. How to Play Place your initial bet or change your bet (from 1-10 credits) and then:

Press DEAL (+) 4 6 5 or 5 or DONE (+) To start a new hand select the card to the left select the card to the right discard selected card undo discard (replaces previous option after discard) remove discarded cards and deal replacements 7 A A G a m e s Press M to select the following options:

Option Change Bet Choose Deck Awards Table Description Change bet amount (not available while hand is in play). Choose the deck image. View the list of odds/payouts for each winning hand. 123 Adjusting Your Settings Reordering Menu Items You can reorder the items in your phones main menu. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Personalize

> Main Menu Press 1 S 2 GRAB (+) 3 S 4 INSERT (+) To scroll to a menu item grab the menu item move the item to a new location in the menu insert the menu item Customizing a Soft Key Function You can relabel the soft keys (- and +) to access different menu items from the idle display. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Personalize > Keys s g n i t t e S r u o Y g n i t s u j d A 124 Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 CHANGE (+) To scroll to Left or Right select the key scroll to the new key function conrm the new function TTY Operation You can use an optional TTY device with your phone to send and receive calls. You must plug the TTY device into the phones headset jack and set the phone to operate in one of three TTY modes. Notes:

Use a TSB-121 compliant cable (provided by the TTY manufacturer) to connect the TTY device to your phone. Set the phone volume to level 4 (middle setting) for proper operation. If you experience a high number of incorrect characters, adjust the volume as necessary to minimize the error rate. For optimal performance, your phone should be at least 12 inches (30 centimeters) away from the TTY device. Placing the phone too close to the TTY device may cause high error rates. A d j u s t i n g Y o u r S e t t i n g s 125 Set TTY Mode When you set your phone to a TTY mode, it operates in that mode whenever the TTY device is connected. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup

> TTY Setup Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 SELECT (+) To scroll to TTY Setup change the TTY mode scroll to the TTY mode select the TTY mode The TTY Setup menu includes the following options:

Option TTY VCO HCO Voice Description Transmit and receive TTY characters Receive TTY characters but transmit by speaking into the microphone Transmit TTY characters but receive by listening to the earpiece Return to normal voice mode When your phone is in a TTY mode, the international TTY symbol and the mode setting are shown in the display. You can press TTYMODE (-) to change the mode setting. s g n i t t e S r u o Y g n i t s u j d A 126 Switch to TTY Mode During a Voice Call Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) 4 S 5 SELECT (+) To open the Call menu scroll to TTY Setup display the TTY Setup menu scroll to the TTY mode select the TTY mode Return to Voice Mode To return to normal voice mode, select Voice from the TTY Setup menu as described on page 126. Hands-Free Use You can purchase an optional Motorola Original hands-free car kit or headset for your phone. These accessories provide alternative ways for you to use your phone without using your hands. Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the laws and regulations on the use of these products. A d j u s t i n g Y o u r S e t t i n g s 127 Automatic Answer You can set your phone to automatically answer calls after two rings (four seconds) when connected to a car kit or headset. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) 3 S 4 CHANGE (+) 5 S 6 SELECT (+) To scroll to Car Settings or Headset select the feature scroll to Auto Answer select Auto Answer scroll to On or Off conrm the setting Automatic Hands-Free You can set your phone to automatically route calls to a car kit when it detects a connection. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Auto Handsfree Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to On or Off conrm the setting s g n i t t e S r u o Y g n i t s u j d A 128 Power-Off Delay When your phone is connected to a car kit, you can set it to stay on for a period of time after you switch off the ignition. This prevents the phone from draining your vehicle battery, but leaves the phone on long enough that you do not have to re-enter your unlock code when making short stops. Note: This feature may not work with all car ignition switches. Caution: If you select Continuous, the phone does not power off when you turn off the ignition. Be careful not to drain your vehicle battery if you select this option. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Power-Off Delay Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to the time delay conrm your selection Charger Time When your phone is connected to a car kit, you can set it to charge itself for a specied time period after you switch off the ignition. This helps ensure that the phone battery gets fully charged while the vehicle is parked. A d j u s t i n g Y o u r S e t t i n g s 129 Note: This feature may not work with all car ignition switches. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Charger Time Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to the charge time conrm your selection s g n i t t e S r u o Y g n i t s u j d A 130 Data Calls A Motorola Original data kit lets you transfer data between your phone and a computer or other external device. You can:

use your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet. use your phone to send and receive data calls on your computer or hand-held device. Connecting Your Phone to an External Device Connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device using a serial cable or a USB cable. Note: Not all devices are compatible with serial cable or USB cable connections. Check your external device for specications. Set Up a Cable Connection Attach a serial cable or Motorola Original USB cable to the phone and external device as follows. Note: Check your computer or hand-held device to determine the type of cable you need. D a t a C a l l s 131 Attaching a Serial Cable Use the interchangeable head on the Motorola Multi-Connect Serial Cable to connect a computer, Palm III device, or Palm V device to your phone. Do This 1 Plug the serial cable into the detachable head. Make sure that the Motorola logo on the detachable head and the metal shielding on the serial cable plug are both facing you. 2 With the Motorola logo and the phone both facing you, plug the detachable head into the phones accessory connector port. 3 Plug the other end of the cable into the serial interface connection on the external device and tighten the screws. s l l a C a t a D 132 Attaching a USB Cable Do This 4 Plug the end of the cable with the Motorola logo into the phones accessory connector port. Make sure that the logo and the phone are both facing you. 5 Plug the other endthe USB connectioninto the USB port on the external device. Install the Software Install the software from the CD-ROM that comes with your Motorola Original data kit. See the data kits user guide for more information. D a t a C a l l s 133 Sending a Data Call Use this procedure to send data from a connected device, and to synchronize phonebook and datebook information between your phone, computer, and/or hand-held device. Connect your phone to the device as described on page 131 and do the following:

To 2 Open the application on your computer Do This 1 Check the phone make sure that the phone is connected and powered on place the call through the application (such as dial-up-networking) Note: You cannot dial data numbers through your phones keypad. You must dial them through your computer. close the call and connection when the transfer is complete 3 End the call from the connected device s l l a C a t a D 134 Receiving a Data Call Use this procedure to transfer data to your computer or hand-held device. Set Up Your Phone Find the Feature M > Settings

> Connection

> Incoming Call Do This 1 Press CHANGE (+) 2 Press S 3 Press SELECT (+) 4 Connect your phone to the device To select Next Call scroll to Data In Only set the call format enable the data transfer Note: You cannot answer incoming voice calls when your phone is in data mode. Any voice calls you receive are treated as unanswered calls. To return a voice call, reset your phone to voice mode as described on page 136. Transfer the Data Your phone noties you when the data call arrives, and transfers the call to the connected device. Use the application running on the device to answer the call. D a t a C a l l s 135 End the Data Connection When the data transfer is complete:

Do This End the call from the connected device To close the connection Reset Normal Voice Operation After making a data call, you must reset your phone to resume normal voice operations. You cannot receive voice calls when your phone is in data mode. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Connection

> Incoming Call Do This 1 Press CHANGE (+) 2 Press S 3 Press SELECT (+) To select Next Call scroll to Normal reset your phone Your phone also reverts to normal voice operations when you turn it off and then turn it back on. s l l a C a t a D 136 Security Assigning a New Code or Password Your phones unlock code is originally set to 1234, and the security code is originally set to 000000. Your service provider may reset these numbers before you receive your phone. If your service provider has not reset these numbers, we recommend that you change them to prevent other users from accessing your personal information. The unlock code must contain four digits, and the security code must contain six digits. Notes:

Your service provider may retain your phones security code for customer service purposes. In this case, you will not be able to use phone features that require you to enter the security code. If the unlock code is the only code you can change, the New Passwords menu is not available. In this case, change the unlock code by selecting: M > Settings

> Security > Phone Lock > Unlock Code. To change a code or password:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> New Passwords S e c u r i t y 137 Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 keypad keys 4 OK (+) 5 keypad keys 6 OK (+) 7 keypad keys 8 OK (+) To scroll to the code or password select the code or password enter your old code submit your old code enter the new code assign the new code re-enter the new code conrm the new code If You Forget a Code or Password If you forget your security code, contact your service provider. If you forget your unlock code, try entering 1234 or the last four digits of your phone number. If that does not work, do the following at the Enter Unlock Code prompt:

Press 1 M 2 keypad keys 3 OK (+) To go to the unlock code bypass screen enter your security code submit your security code y t i r u c e S 138 Locking and Unlocking Your Phone You can lock your phone manually or set the phone to lock automatically whenever you turn it off. To use a locked phone, you must enter the unlock code. A locked phone still rings or vibrates for incoming calls or messages, but you must unlock it to answer. You can make emergency calls on your phone even when it is locked. For more information, see page 29. Lock Your Phone Manually Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock

> Lock Now Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) To enter your unlock code lock the phone Set Your Phone to Lock Automatically You can set your phone to lock every time you turn it off. Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock

> Automatic Lock > On Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) To enter your unlock code activate automatic lock S e c u r i t y 139 Unlock Your Phone At the Enter Unlock Code prompt:

Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) To enter your unlock code unlock your phone Locking and Unlocking Your Keypad You can lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental keypresses (for example, when carrying your phone in a purse or pocket). Press M *

To lock or unlock your keypad Note: Incoming calls and messages unlock the keypad. Restricting Calls You can stop all incoming and/or outgoing calls, or you can restrict them to the numbers stored in your phonebook. Notes:

y t i r u c e S You can make emergency calls when outgoing calls are restricted. Your phone still receives incoming text messages when incoming calls are restricted. 140 When you restrict incoming calls to numbers stored in the phonebook, a valid incoming call may be restricted if caller ID information for the call is not available from the network. Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Restrict Calls Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) 3 S 4 CHANGE (+) 5 CHANGE (+) 6 S 7 SELECT (+) To enter your unlock code open the restrict calls menu scroll to Outgoing Calls or Incoming Calls select the option change the Allow setting scroll to All, None, or Phonebook select the allowed calls Tip: The phonebook is not locked when you restrict outgoing calls to numbers stored in the phonebook. To prevent a user from adding (and then calling) a new phonebook entry, you may want to lock the phonebook. See the Lock Application item on page 53. S e c u r i t y 141 Activating Talk Secure Your phone can attempt to send your calls using a high-

security connection, to prevent others from intercepting them. For more information, see page 28. Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Talk Secure Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to Preferred or Off switch talk secure on or off y t i r u c e S 142 Troubleshooting Check these questions rst if you have problems with your phone. If you need additional help, contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456

(United States) or 1-800-461-4575 (Canada). Question Is your phone set up correctly?

Is your battery charged? Do you see B in the display?

Does the handset have a signal? Do you see j in the display?

Is the earpiece volume too low?

Answer Press M #. If you do not see your phone number, contact your service provider. The battery level indicator should have at least one segment showing (C). If it does not, recharge your battery. See page 19. The signal strength indicator should have at least one segment showing (1). If it does not, move to an area with a stronger signal to use your phone. While on a call, press the upper volume key on the side of your phone. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 143 Answer Your phone may be muted. Press UNMUTE (+) if necessary to unmute the phone. Also, make sure that your phones microphone is not blocked by its carrying case or a sticker. Dropping your phone, getting it wet, or using a non-Motorola battery or battery charger can damage the phone. The phones limited warranty does not cover liquid damage or damage caused from using non-Motorola accessories. Question Is the other party unable to hear you?

Has the phone been damaged, dropped, or gotten wet?

Was a non-Motorola battery or battery charger used?

The following refer to specic problems:

Problem My phone was stolen. To whom should I report this?

I forgot my password. Solution Report a stolen phone to the police and to your service provider

(the company that sends you your monthly wireless service bill). See page 138. g n i t o o h s e l b u o r T 144 Problem I pressed the power key, but nothing happened. The display says: Enter Unlock Code. How do I unlock my phone?

My phone asks for an unlock code when I try to open a feature. My phone does not ring. Solution Be sure to press and hold P

(the power key) until the display appears and you hear an alert. This could take several seconds. If nothing happens, check that a charged battery is installed. See page 18. Enter the factory-preset unlock code (1234), or the last four digits of your phone number. If this fails, call your service provider (the company that sends you your monthly wireless service bill). The application you want is locked. If you do not know the unlock code, see page 138. If you see t or y in the display, then the ringer is turned off. See page 95. Also, the ringer may be set to Silent even though your phone is set to an audible ring style. See page 95. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 145 Problem My phone rings even though I selected the Silent (or Vibrate) ring style. I tried to place a call and heard an alternating high/low tone. I cannot send/

receive calls. Solution The ringer may be set to play a tone even though your phone is set to a silent ring style. See page 95. Your call did not reach the wireless system. You may have dialed the number too soon after turning the phone on. Wait until you see the idle display before making a call. Make sure that you have a phone signal (see the Signal Strength Indicator item on page 24). Avoid electrical or radio interference, and obstructions such as bridges, parking garages, or tall buildings. Your phone also may have the Restrict Calls feature turned on. If you know the unlock code, you can change this setting in the security menu (M > Settings

> Security). g n i t o o h s e l b u o r T 146 Problem My phone has poor reception and drops calls. I cannot hear others on my phone. I cannot open my message inbox. How do I see the calls I sent or received?

Solution Make sure that your antenna is not bent or damaged. Also, make sure you have a phone signal (see the Signal Strength Indicator item on page 24). Stay clear of any obstructions such as bridges, parking garages, or tall buildings. While on a call, press the upper volume key. The display should show the volume increasing. Also, make sure that your phones earpiece is not blocked by its carrying case. Before you can use text messages, you must set up the message inbox. See page 85. To see the most recent calls you dialed or received:

M > Recent Calls

> Received Calls or Dialed Calls T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 147 Problem My phone will not send voicemail commands, passwords, or other codes. My phones display is too dark. My battery didnt last as long as I expected. What can I do to extend battery life Solution Your phone sends commands and passwords as DTMF tones. You can set your phones DTMF tones to be On or Off. If you have trouble sending numbers, check your DTMF setting. 1 From the idle display, press:

M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup > DTMF 2 Press S to scroll to On. 3 Press SELECT (+) to select it. Use the Contrast feature to change the level of contrast in your display. See page 56. You can also use the Backlight feature to change the length of time that the display backlight stays on. See page 55. Your batterys performance is affected by charge time, feature use, temperature changes, backlight use, and other factors. For tips on extending your battery life, see page 25. g n i t o o h s e l b u o r T 148 Problem I am unable to record a voice note, voice name, or voice shortcut. My TTY device doesnt work with my phone. I plugged the data cable into my phone but my phone did not beep. How do I know if the data cable is ready to go?

Solution Try moving to a quieter location to make your voice recording. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. Your phone must be set to a TTY mode for the phone to detect your TTY device. See page 125. The beep indicates that you are set up correctly. If you did not hear a beep, make sure that both ends of the data cable are connected the smaller end to your phone and the larger end to your computer. Also, your computer may have deactivated the port to save power. Try opening an application that uses the port, like a fax or dial-up application, to automatically activate the port. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 149 Problem My phone beeped when I attached the data cable, but my data applications dont work. When sending data with the data cable, why does the computer show a connection rate of 19200 Kbps?

I cant end my data call by closing the application on my computer. What can I do?

Solution You must be in an area with digital coverage. Check your phones display for the digital signal indicator (F). Some wireless networks may not support data transmission. If you see the digital indicator, but you are roaming on an unfamiliar network, this may be the case. Also, remember that data transmission usually requires a subscription. Call your service provider for more information. 19200 Kbps is the data transfer rate of the connection between your computer and the phone. The rate of the connection between your phone and the network is displayed on your phone, and will be either 14400 or 9600 Kbps. Try pressing O on your phone. Or try disconnecting the cable or turning off the phone. If possible, always close the connection through your computer, as these alternative methods may disrupt the application on your computer. g n i t o o h s e l b u o r T 150 Solution You may be in an area without service. If you have wireless service, look in the display for the digital signal indicator (F). If you do not see the indicator, you may be in an area that has only analog service or no service at all. If you see the digital signal indicator, you may be connected to a digital network that does not support Internet access. Try again in a few minutes. The servers may be temporarily busy. Problem I launched the micro-browser but the display says:

Service Not Available. I launched the micro-browser but the display says:

Data Server Unavailable. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 151 Programming Instructions Follow this procedure if you need to program your phones phone number(s). Note: Programming is normally done by a trained technician at the site of purchase. Users should not make changes other than ones in the following procedure. Before programming, ask your service provider for your:

Carrier System ID (a one- to ve-digit number) 10-digit MIN (Mobile Identication Number) Press 1 #, the Carrier System ID number, #, *, N 2 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0

(This is the security code that is in the phone when it is shipped from the factory.) 3 OK (+) 4 S 5 CHANGE (+) To enter programming mode enter the security code submit the security code scroll to MIN open the MIN display s n o i t c u r t s n I g n i m m a r g o r P 152 Press 6 keypad keys for the To enter the new MIN 10-digit MIN 7 OK (+) 8 DONE (-) store the new MIN exit programming mode P r o g r a m m i n g I n s t r u c t i o n s 153 Specic Absorption Rate Data This model phone meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the U.S. Federal Communications Commission for the United States and by Health Canada for Canada. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientic organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientic studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age or health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specic Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC and by Health Canada is 1.6 W/kg.1 Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC and by Industry Canada with the phone transmitting at its highest certied power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certied power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are a t a D e t a R n o i t p r o s b A c i f i c e p S 154 to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public in the U.S. and Canada, it must be tested and certied to the FCC and Industry Canada that it does not exceed the limit established by each government for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) reported to the FCC and available for review by Industry Canada. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.48 W/kg2, and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.73 W/kg.2 (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and regulatory requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the governmental requirements for safe exposure. The FCC and Industry Canada have granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as being in compliance with the FCC and Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on le with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID IHDT56CA1. You may also refer to Motorolas Web site:

http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth S p e c i f i c A b s o r p t i o n R a t e D a t a 155 Additional information on Specic Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) Web site:

http://phonefacts.net or the Canadian Wireless Telecommunications Association

(CWTA) Web site:

http://www.cwta.ca 1. In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 2. Additional related information includes the Motorola testing protocol, assessment procedure, and measurement uncertainty range for this product. ITC01-064 a t a D e t a R n o i t p r o s b A c i f i c e p S 156 The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Phones Additional Health and Safety Information FDA has been receiving inquiries about the safety of mobile phones, including cellular phones and PCS phones. The following summarizes what is knownand what remains unknownabout whether these products can pose a hazard to health, and what can be done to minimize any potential risk. This information may be used to respond to questions. Why the concern?

Mobile phones emit low levels of radio frequency energy (i.e., radio frequency radiation) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of radio frequency energy

(RF), considered non-signicant, when in the stand-by mode. It is well known that high levels of RF can produce biological damage through heating effects (this is how your microwave oven is able to cook food). However, it is not known whether, to what extent, or through what mechanism, lower levels of RF might cause adverse health effects as well. Although some research has been done to address these questions, no clear picture of the biological effects of this type of radiation has emerged to date. Thus, the available science does not allow us to conclude that mobile phones are absolutely safe, or that they are unsafe. However, the available scientic evidence does not demonstrate any adverse health effects associated with the use of mobile phones. A d d i t i o n a l H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 157 What kinds of phones are in question?

Questions have been raised about hand-held mobile phones, the kind that have a built-in antenna that is positioned close to the user's head during normal telephone conversation. These types of mobile phones are of concern because of the short distance between the phone's antennathe primary source of the RFand the person's head. The exposure to RF from mobile phones in which the antenna is located at greater distances from the user (on the outside of a car, for example) is drastically lower than that from hand-held phones, because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with distance from the source. The safety of so-called cordless phones, which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house and which operate at far lower power levels and frequencies, has not been questioned. How much evidence is there that hand-held mobile phones might be harmful?

Briey, there is not enough evidence to know for sure, either way; however, research efforts are on-going. The existing scientic evidence is conicting and many of the studies that have been done to date have suffered from aws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of RF exposures characteristic of mobile phones have yielded conicting results. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. In one study, mice genetically altered to be predisposed to developing one type of cancer developed more than twice as many such cancers when they were exposed to RF energy compared to controls. There is much uncertainty among scientists about whether results obtained from animal studies apply to the use n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 158 of mobile phones. First, it is uncertain how to apply the results obtained in rats and mice to humans. Second, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had already been treated with cancer-causing chemicals, and other studies exposed the animals to the RF virtually continuouslyup to 22 hours per day. For the past ve years in the United States, the mobile phone industry has supported research into the safety of mobile phones. This research has resulted in two ndings in particular that merit additional study:

1 In a hospital-based, case-control study, researchers looked for an association between mobile phone use and either glioma (a type of brain cancer) or acoustic neuroma

(a benign tumor of the nerve sheath). No statistically signicant association was found between mobile phone use and acoustic neuroma. There was also no association between mobile phone use and gliomas when all types of types of gliomas were considered together. It should be noted that the average length of mobile phone exposure in this study was less than three years. When 20 types of glioma were considered separately, however, an association was found between mobile phone use and one rare type of glioma, neuroepithelliomatous tumors. It is possible with multiple comparisons of the same sample that this association occurred by chance. Moreover, the risk did not increase with how often the mobile phone was used, or the length of the calls. In fact, the risk actually decreased with cumulative hours of mobile phone use. Most cancer causing agents increase risk with increased exposure. An ongoing study of brain A d d i t i o n a l H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 159 cancers by the National Cancer Institute is expected to bear on the accuracy and repeatability of these results.1 2 Researchers conducted a large battery of laboratory tests to assess the effects of exposure to mobile phone RF on genetic material. These included tests for several kinds of abnormalities, including mutations, chromosomal aberrations, DNA strand breaks, and structural changes in the genetic material of blood cells called lymphocytes. None of the tests showed any effect of the RF except for the micronucleus assay, which detects structural effects on the genetic material. The cells in this assay showed changes after exposure to simulated cell phone radiation, but only after 24 hours of exposure. It is possible that exposing the test cells to radiation for this long resulted in heating. Since this assay is known to be sensitive to heating, heat alone could have caused the abnormalities to occur. The data already in the literature on the response of the micronucleus assay to RF are conicting. Thus, follow-up research is necessary.2 FDA is currently working with government, industry, and academic groups to ensure the proper follow-up to these industry-funded research ndings. Collaboration with the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) in particular is expected to lead to FDA providing research recommendations and scientic oversight of new CTIA-

funded research based on such recommendations. Two other studies of interest have been reported recently in the literature:

1 Two groups of 18 people were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals under laboratory conditions while n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 160 2 they performed cognitive function tests. There were no changes in the subjects' ability to recall words, numbers, or pictures, or in their spatial memory, but they were able to make choices more quickly in one visual test when they were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals. This was the only change noted among more than 20 variables compared.3 In a study of 209 brain tumor cases and 425 matched controls, there was no increased risk of brain tumors associated with mobile phone use. When tumors did exist in certain locations, however, they were more likely to be on the side of the head where the mobile phone was used. Because this occurred in only a small number of cases, the increased likelihood was too small to be statistically signicant.4 In summary, we do not have enough information at this point to assure the public that there are, or are not, any low incident health problems associated with use of mobile phones. FDA continues to work with all parties, including other federal agencies and industry, to assure that research is undertaken to provide the necessary answers to the outstanding questions about the safety of mobile phones. What is known about cases of human cancer that have been reported in users of hand-held mobile phones?

Some people who have used mobile phones have been diagnosed with brain cancer. But it is important to understand that this type of cancer also occurs among people who have not used mobile phones. In fact, brain cancer occurs in the A d d i t i o n a l H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 161 U.S. population at a rate of about 6 new cases per 100,000 people each year. At that rate, assuming 80 million users of mobile phones (a number increasing at a rate of about 1 million per month), about 4800 cases of brain cancer would be expected each year among those 80 million people, whether or not they used their phones. Thus it is not possible to tell whether any individual's cancer arose because of the phone, or whether it would have happened anyway. A key question is whether the risk of getting a particular form of cancer is greater among people who use mobile phones than among the rest of the population. One way to answer that question is to compare the usage of mobile phones among people with brain cancer with the use of mobile phones among appropriately matched people without brain cancer. This is called a case-control study. The current case-control study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute, as well as the follow-up research to be sponsored by industry, will begin to generate this type of information. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of mobile phones?

Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-

emitting consumer products such as mobile phones before marketing, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if mobile phones are shown to emit radiation at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of mobile phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientic data do not justify FDA regulatory actions at this time, FDA has urged the mobile n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 162 phone industry to take a number of steps to assure public safety. The agency has recommended that the industry:

support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by mobile phones design mobile phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function cooperate in providing mobile phone users with the best possible information on what is known about possible effects of mobile phone use on human health At the same time, FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of mobile phone safety to ensure a coordinated effort at the federal level. These agencies are:

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission Occupational Health and Safety Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health also participates in this group. In the absence of conclusive information about any possible risk, what can concerned individuals do?

If there is a risk from these productsand at this point we do not know that there isit is probably very small. But if people A d d i t i o n a l H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 163 are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, there are simple steps they can take to do so. For example, time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives. Those persons who spend long periods of time on their hand-held mobile phones could consider holding lengthy conversations on conventional phones and reserving the hand-held models for shorter conversations or for situations when other types of phones are not available. People who must conduct extended conversations in their cars every day could switch to a type of mobile phone that places more distance between their bodies and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, they could switch to:

a mobile phone in which the antenna is located outside the vehicle a hand-held phone with a built-in antenna connected to a different antenna mounted on the outside of the car or built into a separate package a headset with a remote antenna to a mobile phone carried at the waist Again, the scientic data do not demonstrate that mobile phones are harmful. But if people are concerned about the radio frequency energy from these products, taking the simple precautions outlined above can reduce any possible risk. Where can I nd additional information?

For additional information, see the following Web sites:

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program (select Information on Human Exposure to RF n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 164 Fields from Cellular and PCS Radio Transmitters):

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety World Health Organization (WHO) International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (select Qs

& As): http://www.who.int/emf United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board:

http://www.nrpb.org.uk Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association

(CTIA): http://www.wow-com.com U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Center for Devices and Radiological Health:

http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/consumer/

1. Muscat et al. Epidemiological Study of Cellular Telephone Use and Malignant Brain Tumors. In: State of the Science Symposium;1999 June 20; Long Beach, California. 2. Tice et al. Tests of mobile phone signals for activity in genotoxicity and other laboratory assays. In: Annual Meeting of the Environmental Mutagen Society; March 29, 1999, Washington, D.C.; and personal communication, unpublished results. 3. Preece, AW, Iwi, G, Davies-Smith, A, Wesnes, K, Butler, S, Lim, E, and Varey, A. Effect of a 915-MHz simulated mobile phone signal on cognitive function in man. Int. J. Radiat. Biol., April 8, 1999. 4. Hardell, L, Nasman, A, Pahlson, A, Hallquist, A and Mild, KH. Use of cellular telephones and the risk for brain tumors: a case-

control study. Int. J. Oncol., 15: 113-116, 1999. ITC00-010 A d d i t i o n a l H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 165 Warranty MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PERSONAL COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES AND SOFTWARE PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES OR CANADA What Does this Warranty Cover?

Subject to the exclusions contained below, Motorola, Inc. warrants its wireless telephones, pagers and consumer two-way radios that operate via Family Radio Service or General Mobile Radio Service (Products), Motorola-branded or certied accessories sold for use with these Products

(Accessories) and Motorola software contained on CD-ROMs or other tangible media and sold for use with these Products (Software) to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal consumer usage for the period(s) outlined below. This limited warranty is a consumer's exclusive remedy, and applies as follows to new Motorola Products, Accessories and Software purchased by consumers in the United States or Canada, which are accompanied by this written warranty:

y t n a r r a W 166 Products and Accessories Products Covered Products and Accessories as dened above, unless otherwise provided for below. Decorative Accessories and Cases. Decorative covers, bezels, PhoneWrap covers and cases. Monaural Headsets. Ear buds and boom headsets that transmit mono sound through a wired connection. Consumer Two-Way Radio Accessories. Products and Accessories that are Repaired or Replaced. Length of Coverage One (1) year from the date of purchase by the rst consumer purchaser of the product unless otherwise provided for below. Limited lifetime warranty for the lifetime of ownership by the rst consumer purchaser of the product. Limited lifetime warranty for the lifetime of ownership by the rst consumer purchaser of the product. Ninety (90) days from the date of purchase by the rst consumer purchaser of the product. The balance of the original warranty or for ninety (90) days from the date returned to the consumer, whichever is longer. W a r r a n t y 167 Exclusions Normal Wear and Tear. Periodic maintenance, repair and replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear are excluded from coverage. Batteries. Only batteries whose fully charged capacity falls below 80% of their rated capacity and batteries that leak are covered by this limited warranty. Abuse & Misuse. Defects or damage that result from:

(a) improper operation, storage, misuse or abuse, accident or neglect, such as physical damage (cracks, scratches, etc.) to the surface of the product resulting from misuse; (b) contact with liquid, water, rain, extreme humidity or heavy perspiration, sand, dirt or the like, extreme heat, or food;

(c) use of the Products or Accessories for commercial purposes or subjecting the Product or Accessory to abnormal usage or conditions; or (d) other acts which are not the fault of Motorola, are excluded from coverage. Use of Non-Motorola Products and Accessories. Defects or damage that result from the use of Non-Motorola branded or certied Products, Accessories, Software or other peripheral equipment are excluded from coverage. Unauthorized Service or Modication. Defects or damages resulting from service, testing, adjustment, installation, maintenance, alteration, or modication in any way by someone other than Motorola, or its authorized service centers, are excluded from coverage. Altered Products. Products or Accessories with (a) serial numbers or date tags that have been removed, altered or obliterated; (b) broken seals or that show evidence of tampering; (c) mismatched board serial numbers; or y t n a r r a W 168

(d) nonconforming or non-Motorola housings, or parts, are excluded form coverage. Communication Services. Defects, damages, or the failure of Products, Accessories or Software due to any communication service or signal you may subscribe to or use with the Products Accessories or Software is excluded from coverage. Software Products Covered Software. Applies only to physical defects in the media that embodies the copy of the software (e.g. CD-ROM, or oppy disk). Length of Coverage Ninety (90) days from the date of purchase. Exclusions Software Embodied in Physical Media. No warranty is made that the software will meet your requirements or will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by third parties, that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be corrected. Software NOT Embodied in Physical Media. Software that is not embodied in physical media (e.g. software that is downloaded from the internet), is provided as is and without warranty. W a r r a n t y 169 Who is Covered?

This warranty extends only to the rst consumer purchaser, and is not transferable. What Will Motorola Do?

Motorola, at its option, will at no charge repair, replace or refund the purchase price of any Products, Accessories or Software that does not conform to this warranty. We may use functionally equivalent reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new Products, Accessories or parts. No data, software or applications added to your Product, Accessory or Software, including but not limited to personal contacts, games and ringer tones, will be reinstalled. To avoid losing such data, software and applications please create a back up prior to requesting service. How to Obtain Warranty Service or Other Information?

To obtain service or information, please call:

Canada All Products 1-800-461-4575 USA Phones 1-800-331-6456 Pagers 1-800-548-9954 Two-Way Radios 1-800-353-2729 TTY 1-888-390-6456 TTY 1-888-390-6456 For Accessories and Software, please call the telephone number designated above for the product with which they are used. y t n a r r a W 170 You will receive instructions on how to ship the Products, Accessories or Software, at your expense, to a Motorola Authorized Repair Center. To obtain service, you must include: (a) a copy of your receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof of purchase; (b) a written description of the problem; (c) the name of your service provider, if applicable;

(d) the name and location of the installation facility (if applicable) and, most importantly; (e) your address and telephone number. What Other Limitations Are There?

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, OTHERWISE THE REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER, AND IS PROVIDED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OF IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, ACCESSORY OR SOFTWARE, OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA, SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE ABILITY OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES OR SOFTWARE TO THE W a r r a n t y 171 FULL EXTENT THESE DAMAGES MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some states and jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, or limitation on the length of an implied warranty, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specic legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state or from one jurisdiction to another. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce and distribute copies of the Motorola software. Motorola software may only be copied into, used in, and redistributed with, the Products associated with such Motorola software. No other use, including without limitation disassembly of such Motorola software or exercise of the exclusive rights reserved for Motorola, is permitted. ITC02-154 y t n a r r a W 172 Product Registration Online Product Registration:

http://www.motorola.com/warranty Product registration is an important step toward enjoying your new Motorola product. Registering helps us facilitate warranty service, and permits us to contact you should your product require an update or other service. Registration is for U.S. residents only and is not required for warranty coverage. Please retain your original dated sales receipt for your records. For warranty service of your Motorola Personal Communications Product you will need to provide a copy of your dated sales receipt to conrm warranty status. Thank you for choosing a Motorola product. Export Law Assurances This product is controlled under the export regulations of the United States of America and Canada. The Governments of the United States of America and Canada may restrict the exportation or re-exportation of this product to certain destinations. For further information contact the U.S. Department of Commerce or the Canadian Department of Foreign Affairs and International Trade. 173 Index A accessories optional 10, 80, 110, 125, 127, 131 standard 18 accessory connector port 1 active line indicator dened 24 illustration 23 Add Digits feature 60 alarm 75, 77 alert creating 97104 dened 95 reminders, turning on/off 104 selecting 9596 turning off 30 analog signal indicator dened 24 illustration 23 animation 56 answering a call 22 antenna 1 application, locking 53 x e d n I 174 appointments. See datebook Attach Number feature 32, 60 B backlight 55 battery car kit charger time 129 charging 1920 extending battery life 2527, 55, 56 installing 1819 level indicator 20, 23, 24 meter 52 battery save 56 blackjack 120121 block cursor, dened 38 browse text mode 39 browser. See micro-browser C calculator 116118 calendar. See datebook call call (continued) adding digits after phone received calls list 32, number 60 alert, creating 97104 alert, selecting 9596 alert, turning off 30 answer options 53 answering 22 call waiting 33 calling card 67 canceling 30 data call 134136 datebook, opening 34 deleting 5960 dialed calls list 32, 34, 5960 dialing 21 dialing a recent call 5960 emergency number 29 ending 22 in-call timer 53 incoming call type, setting 135136 making 21 message center, accessing 34 muting 34 prex digits, inserting 32 34, 5960 receiving 22 recent calls 5960 restricting 140141 ring style, setting 95 secure connection 28, 142 speakerphone, activating 34 storing 5960 three-way call 33 timing 6163 unanswered call 29 voice dial 32 call timers 6163 resetting 63 viewing 63 call waiting 33 caller ID 28, 29 calling card call 67 calling line identication. See caller ID car kit automatic answer 128 automatic hands-free 128 charger time 129 power-off delay 129 privacy 28, 142 clock 23 I n d e x 175 codes changing 137138 default 21 if you forget a code/password 138 original 137 computer connecting to phone 131133 contrast, display 56 currency converter 118 cursor 38 customer service, calling 49 customizing the menu 124 D data call connecting to external device 131133 incoming call format, setting 135136 receiving 135136 sending 134 date, setting 55 datebook adding an event 77 alarm 77 calendar 75 changing event information 77 x e d n I 176 datebook (continued) copying an event 78 day view 76 deleting an event 79 event reminders, turning on/off 104 event view 76 reminders 77 week view 75 deleting a call 5960 dialed calls list 32, 34, 5960 dialing a number 21 Dialing Menu 61 digital signal indicator dened 24 illustration 23 display animation 56 backlight 55 contrast 56 described 2325 greeting 54 idle display 23 illustration 23 language 56 zoom setting 55 zooming in/out 25 drafts folder 50 DTMF tones 34, 56, 60, 148 E earpiece illustration 1 volume, adjusting 25 email address, storing in phonebook 6567 email, sending 70, 9193 emergency number 29 end key functions 1, 22 menu functions 35 ending a call 22 Enter Unlock Code message 138, 140 event alert 9596 exchange rate, calculating 118 external device connecting to phone 131133 F factory settings, resetting 5657 falling numbers 121122 ashing cursor, dened 38 FM Stereo Radio Headset 49, 8082 G games 119123 greeting, display 54 H hands-free mode automatic answer 128 automatic call routing 128 charger time 129 dened 127 power-off delay 129 speakerphone, activating 34 headset automatic answer 128 FM Stereo Radio Headset 49, 8082 headset jack 1 high-security connection 28, 142 I idle display, dened 23 in use indicator dened 24 illustration 23 inbox, text message 8586 in-call timer 53 I n d e x 177 incoming call canceling 30 type, setting 135136 Incoming Call message 28 indicators active line 23, 24 battery level 20, 23, 24 digital/analog signal 23, 24 in use 23, 24 loud ring style 25, 95 menu 23, 24 message waiting 23, 24, 87 missed call 29 ring style 23, 25, 95 roam 23, 24 signal strength 23, 24 silent alert 25 silent ring style 25, 95 soft ring style 25, 95 vibrate and ring style 25, 95 vibrate style 25, 95 voice message waiting 23, 24, 84 voice name 64 iTAP software 4447 K key end 1, 22, 35 left soft key 1, 23, 35, 124 lock 53, 140 menu 1, 10, 24, 35 power 1, 21 right soft key 1, 23, 35, 124 scroll 1, 35 send 1, 21, 22, 59 voice 1, 69, 108 volume control 1, 25 keypad answering calls 53 locking and unlocking 53, 140 volume, setting 97 L language, setting 56 left soft key customizing 124 functions 1, 23, 35 Line Not Secure message 29 lock applications 53 keypad 53, 140 x e d n I 178 lock (continued) phone 139140 voice notes 112 lock application feature 53 loud ring style indicator 25, 95 menu (continued) rearranging features 124 scroll feature 55 Text Msg Menu 8990 using features 10, Low Battery message 24 3638 M making a call 21 master clear 57 master reset 56 Memory is Full! message 87 menu Browser Menu 115 Calculator Menu 116 customizing 124 Datebook Menu 75, 76 Dialing Menu 32, 61 entering text 3738, 3947 features 4858 language, setting 56 Last Calls Menu 60 lists 36 locking applications 53 My Tones Menu 102, 104 navigating 10, 35 Phonebook Menu 64 Quick Note Menu 9394 Voice Notes Menu 109, 110, 111 menu indicator dened 24 illustration 23 menu key 1, 10, 24, 35 message deleting, text 8790 dialing number from 31 drafts folder 50 inbox setup, text message 8586 locking, text 8790 outbox 50, 94 quick note 9394 reading, text 8790 receiving, text 8687 reminders, receiving 84, 87 reminders, turning on/off 104 sending 32, 9193 sound 90 status 94 I n d e x 179 message (continued) text 8594 voicemail 8384 message waiting indicator dened 24 displayed 87 illustration 23 micro-browser using 114115 microphone 1 missed call indicator 29 Missed Call message 29 missed call, dialing 32 muting a call 34 my telephone number 22, 34, 51 my tones 97104 My Tones Menu 102, 104 N network settings 57 notepad dened 61 entering digits 61 retrieving digits 61 number, viewing your own 51 numeric text mode 39 O one-touch dial dened 31 using 31 voicemail number 31 optional accessory, dened 10 optional feature, dened 10 outbox 50, 94 P passwords. See codes pause character 68 phone active line indicator 24 alert, turning off 30 answer options 53 codes 137138 connecting to external device 131133 erase user-entered information 57 feature specications 34, 52 information 34 keypad, locking and unlocking 53, 140 locking 139140 muting a call 34 x e d n I 180 phone (continued) reset all options 56 secure connection 28, 142 security code 137 specications 34, 52 turning on/off 21 unlock code 21, 137, 138 unlocking 21, 139140 voice dial 32 phone number active line indicator 24 active phone line, changing 52 adding digits after 60 attaching to prex digits 32 attaching two numbers 60 redialing 28 seeing your own 22, 34 sending text message to 32 phonebook (continued) deleting an entry 71 dialing a number 70 editing an entry 71 email address 64 entry details 64 entry name 64 number type indicator 64 one-touch dial 31 phone number 64 prex digits, inserting 32 primary number, setting 71 ringer ID, activating/deactiv ating 96 ringer ID, dened 66, 96 ringer ID, setting 66 sending an email 70 sorting entries 73 speed dial number 64, 66 storing in phonebook speed dial number, 6567 viewing your own 51 voice dial 32 phonebook attaching two numbers 60 capacity, checking 72 dened 31 speed dial, using 31 storing an entry 6567 voice name entry 69 voice name indicator 64 PIN code 67 power key 1, 21 I n d e x 181 predictive text entry 4447 privacy, call 28, 142 Q quick dial changing number(s) 55 using 49 quick note 9394 dened 85 R radio 8082 received calls list 32, 34, 5960 recent calls 5960 redial busy number 28 reminders datebook 77 dened 104 text message 87 turning on/off 104 voicemail message 84 restricting calls 140141 right soft key customizing 124 functions 1, 23, 35 ring alert selecting 9596 turning off 30 ring style customizing 9597 dened 95 indicators 25, 95 setting 95 ring style indicator dened 25, 95 illustration 23 ringer volume, adjusting 25 volume, setting 97 ringer ID activating/deactivating 96 dened 66, 96 listed in phonebook entry 64 setting for phonebook entry 66 roam indicator dened 24 illustration 23 S scroll feature 55 scroll keys 1, 35 secure connection 28, 142 security code changing 137138 send key 1, 21, 22, 59 short message service. See text message x e d n I 182 shortcuts creating 105106 standard 105 using 107 signal strength indicator dened 24 illustration 23 silent alert indicator 25 silent ring style indicator 25, 95 SMS. See text message soft keys customizing 124 functions 23, 35 illustration 1 labels 23 soft ring style indicator 25, 95 sound storing 90 speakerphone, activating 34 speed dial changing number 66 number, dened 31 sorting phonebook entries by 73 using 31 standby time, increasing 27 storing a call 5960 symbol text mode 4344 symbols, entering 4344 T Talk Secure feature 28, 142 tap method text entry 4042 telephone number, viewing your own 51 text block cursor 38 browse mode 39 character chart 42 entering from keypad 3947 entry mode, changing 39 ashing cursor 38 iTAP software predictive text entry 4447 numeric mode 39 symbol chart 43 symbol mode 4344 tap method 4042 text message dened 85 deleting 8790 dialing number from 31 drafts folder 50 inbox setup 8586 locking 8790 I n d e x 183 text message (continued) outbox 50 quick note 9394 reading 8790 receiving 8687 reminders 87 sending 32, 9193 sound 90 status 94 text mode, changing 39 three-way call 33 time, setting 55 timers 6163 resetting 63 viewing 63 travel charger, using 20 TTY device 125127 U unlock keypad 53, 140 phone 139140 unlock code 138 bypassing 138 changing 137138 entering 21, 139, 140 V vibrate alert selecting 9596 turning off 30 vibrate and ring style indicator 25, 95 vibrate ring style setting 95 vibrate style indicator 25, 95 video poker 122123 voice dial dialing a number 32, 70 recording voice name 69 voice key dialing a number 32 functions 1 recording a voice name 69 recording a voice note 108 voice message waiting indicator 23, 24, 84 voice name dened 69 phonebook indicator 64 recording 69 voice notes 108113 x e d n I 184 voice shortcut creating 105106 dened 105 using 107 voicemail dialing with one-touch dial 31 reminders, turning on/off 104 using 8384 volume earpiece 25 keypad 97 ringer 25, 97 volume keys 1, 25 W wait character 68 warranty 166172 Web pages 114115 Z zoom setting 55 zooming in/out 25 U.S. patent Re. 34,976 I n d e x 185 x e d n I 186

Wireless Phone Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!

Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies the benets of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your rst responsibility. If you nd it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:

1 Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road. 187

2 When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motorola Original hands-

free accessories available today. 3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. 4 Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy trafc or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy trafc can be hazardous. 5 If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibilitydriving safely. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the trafc; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into trafc. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 188

8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of re, trafc accident or medical emergencies.*

9 Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you.*

10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken trafc signal, a minor trafc accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.*

* Wherever wireless phone service is available. 189 Check the laws and regulations on the use of wireless telephones and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas.

For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE or visit the CTIA Web site at www.wow-com.com ITC00-011 190 motorola.com 8988485L49-O

 

 

APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT56CA1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows:

EXHIBIT 8 Motorola V120t Mobile Phone Users Guide

(Tarpon) TDMA R1.3 Technical Review Draft February 8, 2002 RY A Changes to TDMA R1.3 Files:

PRELIMIN Menu Map chapter. Changed Message menu option order. Menu Map chapter. Added Ring Styles to main menu, removed Ring/Vibrate from Settings menu. Menu Map chapter. Added Location feature to the Settings menu for Tarpon V120x phones. Menu Map chapter. Added TTY Setup to the Initial Setup menu. Getting Started/Charging the Battery section. Rewrote rst paragraph as required (new boilerplate text). About Your Phone chapter. Changed ring or vibrate alert references to ring styles. 1 2 About Your Phone/Battery Use section. Added new intro paragraph (new boilerplate text), and the Extending Battery Life section. Sending and Receiving Calls/Dialing With One-

Touch Dial section. Rewrote voicemail description. RY A Entering Text/Tap Method/General Text Entry Rules section. Rewrote text entry callouts (Phoenix and Tarpon phones) to document cursor left/right movement in numeric mode. Menu Feature Descriptions chapter. Moved Ring/

Vibrate up to a top-level menu feature, renamed it to Ring Styles. Menu Feature Descriptions/Settings Menu/Phone Status section. Added Active Line feature description. Menu Feature Descriptions chapter. Added TTY Setup feature description to the Initial Setup section. Phonebook/Storing a Phonebook Entry section. Added procedural steps that describe how to turn on/

off distinctive ringer ID tones (TDMA phones). Phonebook/Storing a Phonebook Entry section. Added procedural steps that describe how to create multiple phonebook entries for a single name. Messages - Voicemail/Storing Your Voicemail Number section and Listening to a Voicemail Message section. Rewrote text related to storing the voicemail number as phonebook entry number 1. PRELIMIN RY A Messages-Voicemail/Receiving a New Voicemail Message section. Second paragraph, rewrote reminders interval description, eliminated reference to every ve minutes. Messages - Text/Setting Up the Text Message Inbox section. Added procedural steps that describe how to turn on/off SMS Alerts during a voice call (TDMA phones). Messages-Text/Receiving a Text Message section. Second paragraph, changed reminders interval description, eliminated reference to every ve minutes. Messages-Text/Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message section. Added new indicators to rst procedure step. Moved the Create Message option to the top of the Text Msg Menu table. Messages - Text chapter. Added new section Storing Sounds From a Text Message (TDMA phones). Added new Ring Styles chapter. Ring Styles/Setting Reminders section. Changed reminders interval description, eliminated reference to every ve minutes. Ring Styles/Customizing a Ring Style/Activate and Deactivate Ringer IDs section added (TDMA phones). Browser chapter. Added new section Downloading Sounds (TDMA phones). PRELIMIN 3 Games chapter. Rewrote existing descriptions for BlackJack, MindBlaster, and Paddleball. Added new descriptions for Falling Numbers, Reversal, and Video Poker. (New descriptions added as appropriate for specic CDMA and TDMA phones.) RY A Adjusting Your Settings chapter. Removed Ring/

Vibrate and Reminders sections, created new Ring Styles chapter for those topics. Adjusting Your Settings/Use the My Tones Feature section. Added new Downloading Tones section

(TDMA phones). Adjusting Your Settings chapter. Added new TTY Operation section. Troubleshooting chapter. Added new TTY note. Troubleshooting chapter. Added new text about the backlight affecting battery life. Troubleshooting chapter. Updated references to Ring Styles feature. Programming Instructions chapter. Rewrote instructions to support dual NAM programming. PRELIMIN 4 Welcome Welcome to the world of Motorola digital wireless communications! We are pleased that you have chosen the Motorola V120t wireless phone. Earpiece Power Key Antenna Display Headset Jack Insert headset accessory. Volume Keys Adjust earpiece and ringer volume. PRELIMIN Accessory Connector Port Insert charger and phone accessories. Left Soft Key Perform functions identied by left display prompt. End Key End phone calls, exit menu system. Menu Key RY A Voice Key Record voice notes, phonebook and shortcut names. Right Soft Key Perform functions identied by right display prompt. Send Key Send and answer calls, view recent dialed calls list. Scroll Keys Move through menus and lists. Microphone 1 Personal Communications Sector 600 North U.S. Highway 45 Libertyville, Illinois 60048 1-800-331-6456 (United States) 1-888-390-6456 (TTY/TDD United States) 1-800-461-4575 (Canada) RY A

(United States)

(Canada) www.motorola.com www.motorola.ca MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. &

Tm. Off. TrueSync, Sidekick, Starsh, and the Stylized Starsh Logo are registered trademarks of Starsh Software, Inc., a wholly owned independent subsidiary of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. 2002 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Software Copyright Notice The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be modied, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Manual number: 6809438A79-O Cover number:

8988485L49-O PRELIMIN 2 Menu Map Main Menu Recent Calls Received Calls Dialed Calls Notepad Call Times RY A Note: This is the standard phone menu layout. You or your service provider may have changed the menu layout or changed some feature names. Not all features may be available for all users. For example, the Radio feature on the main menu (left) is displayed only when the optional FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory is plugged into the accessory connector port on your phone

(see phone illustration, page 1). Shortcuts Change display zoom:

Press M, then press and hold M Lock/unlock keypad:

Press M *

Display my phone number:

Press M #

Go to dialed calls list:

Press N Exit menu system:

Press O Phonebook Datebook Quick Dial Radio Messages Ring Styles Text Msgs Create Msg Voicemail Browser Alerts Quick Notes Outbox Drafts PRELIMIN Style Style Detail My Tones

(see next page) Shortcuts Voice Notes Browser Calculator Games Settings 3 Other Settings Personalize RY A Main Menu Keys Greeting Quick Dial Initial Setup Time and Date Auto PIN Dial Auto Redial Backlight Zoom TTY Setup Scroll Animation Language Battery Save Contrast DTMF Master Reset Master Clear Network Car Settings Headset Settings Menu Phone Status My Tel. Number Active Line Battery Meter Other Information Connection Incoming Call In-Call Setup Answer Options In-Call Timer Security Phone Lock Lock Keypad Lock Application Talk Secure Restrict Calls New Passwords PRELIMIN 4 Contents RY A Menu Map . 3 About This Guide . 10 Safety and General Information. 11 Getting Started . 18 Whats in the Box? . 18 Installing the Battery . 18 Charging the Battery . 19 Turning Your Phone On . 20 Sending a Call . 21 Ending a Call . 22 Receiving a Call . 22 Displaying Your Phone Number . 22 About Your Phone . 23 Display . 23 Changing the Zoom Setting . 25 Volume Keys . 25 Battery Use . 26 Sending and Receiving Calls. 28 Redialing a Number . 28 Using Automatic Redial . 28 Caller ID . 29 Talk Secure . 29 Returning an Unanswered Call . 29 Dialing an Emergency Number . 30 Terminating an Incoming Call . 30 Dialing With Speed Dial . 31 Dialing With One-Touch Dial . 31 Dialing a Number In a Text Message . 32 PRELIMIN C o n t e n t s 5 RY A Additional Dialing Features . 32 Using Features While On a Call . 35 Using Call Waiting . 35 Making a Three-Way Call . 35 Additional On-Call Features . 36 Using the Menu . 37 Navigating to a Feature . 37 Selecting a Feature Option . 38 Entering Feature Information . 39 Entering Text. 41 Choosing a Text Mode . 41 Tap Method . 42 Symbol Mode . 45 Predictive Text Entry with iTAP Software . 46 Menu Feature Descriptions . 50 Recent Calls . 63 Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List . 63 Using the Notepad . 64 Viewing and Resetting Call Timers . 65 Phonebook . 67 Fields in a Phonebook Entry . 67 Storing a Phonebook Entry . 68 Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry . 70 Dialing a Phonebook Entry . 71 Editing a Phonebook Entry . 72 Deleting a Phonebook Entry . 72 Checking Phonebook Capacity . 73 Sorting the Phonebook List . 73 Datebook. 75 Week View . 75 Day View . 76 PRELIMIN s t n e t n o C 6 RY A Event View . 76 Storing a Datebook Event . 77 Changing Event Information . 77 Copying an Event . 78 Deleting an Event . 79 Radio . 80 Turning the Radio On and Off . 80 Tuning a Station . 81 Storing a Preset . 81 Selecting a Preset . 81 Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On . 81 MessagesVoicemail. 83 Storing Your Voicemail Number . 83 Receiving a Voicemail Message . 84 Listening to a Voicemail Message . 84 MessagesText . 85 Setting Up the Text Message Inbox . 85 Receiving a Text Message . 86 Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message . 87 Storing Sounds From a Text Message . 89 Sending a Text Message . 91 Sending a Quick Note Text Message . 93 Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages . 94 Ring Styles . 95 Selecting a Ring Style . 95 Customizing a Ring Style . 96 Using My Tones . 97 Setting Reminders . 103 Shortcuts . 104 Standard Shortcuts . 104 Creating a Shortcut . 104 PRELIMIN C o n t e n t s 7 RY A Using Shortcuts . 106 Voice Notes. 107 Recording a Voice Note . 107 Viewing the Voice Notes List . 108 Playing a Voice Note . 109 Locking and Unlocking a Voice Note . 111 Deleting a Voice Note . 112 Micro-Browser . 113 Starting a Micro-Browser Session . 113 Interacting With Web Pages . 114 Downloading a Sound File . 114 Calculator . 116 Calculating Numbers . 116 Converting Currency . 118 Games . 119 Playing a Game . 119 Game Options . 119 Blackjack . 120 Falling Numbers . 122 Video Poker . 122 Adjusting Your Settings . 125 Reordering Menu Items . 125 Customizing a Soft Key Function . 125 TTY Operation . 126 Hands-Free Use . 128 Data Calls . 131 Connecting Your Phone to an External Device . 131 Sending a Data Call . 133 Receiving a Data Call . 134 Security . 137 Assigning a New Code or Password . 137 PRELIMIN s t n e t n o C 8 If You Forget a Code or Password . 138 Locking and Unlocking Your Phone . 139 Locking and Unlocking Your Keypad . 140 Restricting Calls . 140 Activating Talk Secure . 141 Troubleshooting . 143 Programming Instructions . 152 Specic Absorption Rate Data . 154 Additional Health and Safety Information . 157 Warranty . 167 Product Registration . 175 Export Law Assurances . 175 Index. 176 Wireless Phone Safety Tips . 189 RY A PRELIMIN C o n t e n t s 9 About This Guide This user guide introduces you to the many features in your Motorola wireless phone. Navigating To a Menu Feature You can access many of your phones features through the menu system. This guide shows you how to navigate to a specic menu feature as follows:

RY A Find the Feature M > Messages

> Text Msgs The > symbol means that you should scroll to and select the feature. This example shows that you must press M, scroll to and select Messages, then scroll to and select Text Msgs. Optional Features PRELIMIN Features marked with this label are optional network and/or subscription-dependent features. These features may not be offered by all service providers in all geographical areas. Contact your service provider for more information. Optional Accessories Features marked with this label require the use of an optional Motorola Original accessory. i i e d u G s h T t u o b A 10 Safety and General Information a f e t y a n d G e n e r a RY S A IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR PHONE. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to July 2000. For information regarding radio use in a hazardous atmosphere please refer to the Factory Mutual

(FM) Approval Manual Supplement or Instruction Card, which is included with radio models that offer this capability. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. PRELIMIN RF Operational Characteristics Your phone contains a transmitter and a receiver. When it is ON, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) energy. The phone operates in the frequency range of 824 MHz to 849 MHz in analog and digital mode and 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz in digital mode. When you communicate with your phone, the system handling your call controls the power levels at which your phone transmits. The output power level typically may vary over a l I n f o r m a t i o n 11 range from ____ watts to ____ watts in analog mode and ____ watts to ____ watts in digital mode. Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy Your Motorola phone is designed to comply with the following national and international standards and guidelines regarding exposure of human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic energy:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J RY A American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition PRELIMIN National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) of the United States, Report 86, 1986 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation-Human Exposure) Standard 1999 To assure optimal phone performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within n o i t a m r o f n I l a r e n e G d n a y t e f a S 12 the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:

a f e t y a n d G e n e r a RY S A Portable Phone Operation and EME Exposure Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modications, or attachments could damage the phone and may violate FCC regulations. Do NOT hold the antenna when the phone is in use. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed. Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your phone as you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the microphone. Body-Worn Operation To maintain compliance with FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a phone on your body when transmitting, always place the phone in a Motorola-supplied or approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may exceed FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use one of the Motorola-supplied or approved body-worn accessories, and are not using the phone held in the normal use position, ensure the phone and its antenna are at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body when transmitting. PRELIMIN l I n f o r m a t i o n 13 RY A Data Operation When using any data feature of the phone, with or without an accessory cable, position the phone and its antenna at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body. Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories, visit our website at www.mot.com. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise congured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conicts, turn off your phone in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your phone when on board an aircraft. Any use of a phone must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be PRELIMIN n o i t a m r o f n I l a r e n e G d n a y t e f a S 14 maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by, and recommendations of, the United States Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:

RY S A a f e t y a n d G e n e r a ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches

(15 centimeters) from your pacemaker when the phone is turned ON. NOT carry the phone in the breast pocket. use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. turn OFF the phone immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. PRELIMIN Safety and General Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the area where you drive. Always obey them. l I n f o r m a t i o n 15 When using your phone while driving, please:

give full attention to driving and to the road. use hands-free operation, if available. pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. RY A Operational Warnings For Vehicles With an Air Bag Do not place a portable phone in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inate with great force. If a portable phone is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inates, the phone may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your phone prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless the phone is a model specically identied as being Intrinsically Safe. Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or re resulting in bodily injury or even death. Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. PRELIMIN n o i t a m r o f n I l a r e n e G d n a y t e f a S 16 Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn OFF your phone when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. RY S A Operational Cautions Antennas Do not use any portable phone that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. a n d G e n e r a a f e t y PRELIMIN ITC01-101 l I n f o r m a t i o n 17 Getting Started Whats in the Box?

Your wireless phone typically comes equipped with a battery and a charger. Other accessory options can customize your phone for maximum performance and portability. To purchase Motorola Original accessories, contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456 in the United States or 1-800-461-4575 in Canada. Installing the Battery You must install and charge the battery to use your phone. RY A Your phone is designed to be used only with Motorola Original batteries and accessories. We recommend that you store batteries in their protective cases when not in use. Do This 1 Remove the battery from its protective clear PRELIMIN plastic case. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 18 Do This 2 If the phones battery door is in place, slide down the release latch and lift the door off of the phone. 3 Insert the battery, Release latch RY A 4 Replace the battery door. printed arrows rst, into the battery compartment and push down. PRELIMIN Charging the Battery New batteries are shipped partially charged. Before you can use your phone, you need to install and charge the battery, as indicated by the following instructions. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 19 Some batteries perform best after several full charge/

discharge cycles. Do This 1 Plug the travel charger into your phone with the release tab facing up. Release tab RY A Note: When you charge the battery, the battery level indicator in the upper right corner of the display shows how 2 Plug the other end of the travel charger into the 3 When your phone indicates that the battery is fully charged (Charge Complete), press the release tab and remove the travel charger. appropriate electrical outlet. PRELIMIN Power key much of the charging process is complete. Turning Your Phone On Do This 1 Press and hold P turn on your phone To d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 20 Do This 2 If necessary, enter your four-digit unlock code and press OK (+) To unlock your phone The unlock code is originally set to 1234. Your service provider may change this number before you receive your phone. RY A Press 1 keypad keys Sending a Call To call a number, your phone must be unlocked and have a network connection with adequate signal strength. To dial the phone number Tip: If you make a mistake, press DELETE (-) to delete the last digit, or press and hold DELETE (-) to clear all digits. send the call PRELIMIN Note: You can make an emergency call even when the phone is locked. See Dialing an Emergency Number on page 30. 2 N G e t t i n g S t a r t e d 21 Ending a Call Press O To end the call Receiving a Call To receive a call, your phone must have a network connection with adequate signal strength. If your phone is locked, you must unlock it to answer the call. When you receive a call, your phone rings and/or vibrates and displays an incoming call message. RY A Displaying Your Phone Number From the idle display:

To see your phone number To answer the call Press N or ANSWER (+) PRELIMIN Press M #

d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 22 About Your Phone See page 1 for a basic phone diagram. Display Phone status indicators appear at the top of the display. Messages, phone numbers, and menu options appear below the status indicators. Labels at the bottom corners of the display show the current soft key functions. When you see the M (menu) indicator at the bottom center of the display, you can press M to open the main menu or a feature sub-menu. Some phone functions must be performed from the idle display, the standard display that you see when you are not on a call or using the menu. RY A A Y o u r P h o n e b o u t Indicator Indicator Roam In Use PRELIMIN Strength Indicator Digital/

Analog Signal Indicator Ring Style Indicator Signal 12:00am Message Waiting Indicator Voice Message Waiting Indicator Battery Level Indicator Digital/

Analog Signal Indicator Clock Menu Indicator 23 Signal Strength Indicator Vertical bars show the strength of the network connection. You cannot send or receive calls when the j (no signal) indicator is displayed. Digital (F) or Analog (I) Signal Indicators Your service provider may use one or both indicators to show whether you are receiving a digital or analog signal. In Use Indicator Shows that a call is in progress. RY A Message Waiting Indicator Appears when you receive a text message. Voice Message Waiting Indicator Appears when you receive a voicemail message. Roam Indicator Shows that your phone is seeking or using another network system outside your home network. PRELIMIN Battery Level Indicator Vertical bars show the amount of charge left in your battery. Recharge the battery as soon as possible when your phone displays Low Battery and you hear the low battery alert. Menu Indicator Shows that you can press M to open a menu. Clock Shows the current time. e n o h P r u o Y t u o b A 24 Ring Style Indicator Shows the current selected ring style. The default setting is a ringer. w = loud ring y = vibrate t = silent x = soft ring u = ring and vibrate b o u t Y o u r P h o n e RY A A Changing the Zoom Setting You can set your phones display to show three lines or two lines of text plus soft key labels. Three lines of text display more information, while two lines increase text size. To change the display view, press M once, then press and hold M again within two seconds of the rst press. You can also adjust the zoom setting from the menu. See the Zoom option on page 59. Volume Keys Use the upper and lower volume keys to adjust your phones earpiece and ringer volume. PRELIMIN To increase or decrease earpiece volume increase or decrease ringer volume Press volume keys volume keys When you are in a call the idle display is showing Volume keys 25 Battery Use Battery performance depends on many factors, including your wireless carriers network conguration;

signal strength; the temperature at which you operate your phone; the features and/or settings you select and use; and your voice, data, and other application usage patterns. Battery Care Caution: To prevent injuries or burns, do not allow metal objects to contact or short-circuit the battery terminals. To maximize your batterys performance:

RY A Always use Motorola Original batteries and battery chargers. The phone warranty does not cover damage caused from using non-Motorola batteries and/or battery chargers. New batteries or batteries that have been stored for long periods of time may require a longer charge time. PRELIMIN when charging. Do not expose batteries to temperatures below -10C

(14F) or above 45C (113F). Always take your phone with you when you leave your vehicle. When you do not intend to use a battery for a while, store it uncharged in a cool, dark, dry place, such as a refrigerator. Over extended periods of time, batteries gradually wear down and require longer charging times. This is Maintain the battery at or near room temperature e n o h P r u o Y t u o b A 26 normal. If you charge your battery regularly and notice a decrease in talk time or an increase in charging time, then it is probably time to purchase a new battery. The rechargeable batteries that power this product must be disposed of properly and may need to be recycled. Refer to your batterys label for battery type. Contact your local recycling center for proper disposal methods. Never dispose of batteries in a re because they may explode. Extending Battery Life RY A A Talk less or send fewer messages Its simple, but the more you talk or send text or chat messages, the more battery power you use. Y o u r P h o n e b o u t The backlight uses power, too. To turn it off, see the Backlight option on page 59. Avoid keypad-intense functions Turn off your display backlight PRELIMIN Spend less time on the Internet Activities that require intensive keystroke use (such as playing a game or using messaging) reduce your phones talk and standby time. Lock the keypad (see page 140) when storing the phone in your purse or pocket to avoid unnecessary keypad and backlight activations. Using your phones Internet micro-browser reduces the phones talk and standby time. 27 Sending and Receiving Calls For basic instructions on how to send a call, end a call, RY A To hang up redial the busy number and receive a call, see pages 2122. Redialing a Number If you hear an ordinary busy signal:

Using Automatic Redial Press 1 O 2 N PRELIMIN If the network is busy, you hear a fast busy signal, and your phone displays Call Failed. With automatic redial, your phone automatically repeats the call attempt for four minutes. When the call goes through, your phone rings or vibrates one time, displays Redial Successful, and then connects the call. You must turn on automatic redial to use the feature. See the Auto Redial option on page 58. s l l a C g n v i i e c e R d n a g n d n e S i 28 When automatic redial is turned off, you can manually activate the feature to redial a phone number. When you hear a fast busy signal and see Call Failed:

Press N or RETRY (+) Caller ID To activate automatic redial RY S A e n d n g a n d R e c e i The calling line identication (caller ID) feature displays the callers phone number for incoming calls. If the callers name is stored in your phonebook, the phone displays the name. If caller ID information is not available, the phone displays Incoming Call. Talk Secure When talk secure is activated, your phone always tries to use a high-security connection to prevent others from intercepting your calls. To activate the secure connection feature, see Activating Talk Secure on page 141. Note: If a high-security connection is not available, your phone uses a standard connection. Your phone displays the message Line Not Secure when using a standard connection, unless caller ID or other information already lls the display. Returning an Unanswered Call Your phone keeps a record of your unanswered calls, and displays:

PRELIMIN i i v n g C a l l s 29 the T (missed call) indicator X Missed Calls Y Unknown, where X is the total number of missed calls and Y is the number of missed calls with no caller ID information Press 1 VIEW (+) 2 S 3 N To see the received calls list select a call to return RY A send the call Dialing an Emergency Number Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers, such as 911, that you can call under any circumstances, even when your phone is locked. Note: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your phones emergency number(s) may not work in all locations. PRELIMIN Press 1 keypad keys 2 N Press O or IGNORE (-) Terminating an Incoming Call While the phone is ringing or vibrating:

To dial the emergency number call the emergency number To cancel the incoming call s l l a C g n v i i e c e R d n a g n d n e S i 30 Depending on your phone settings and the type of subscription you have with your service provider, the call may be forwarded to another number, or the caller may hear a busy signal. Dialing With Speed Dial Each entry you store in your phonebook is assigned a unique speed dial number. To speed dial a phonebook entry:

RY S A e n d n g a n d R e c e i 2 #

3 N call the entry Press 1 keypad keys To enter the speed dial number for the entry you want to call submit the number PRELIMIN Dialing With One-Touch Dial To call phonebook entries 1 through 9, just press and hold the one-digit speed dial number for one second. It is recommended that you reserve phonebook entry 1

(speed dial number 1) for storing and dialing your voicemail number. In many cases, your service provider has already done this for you. For more information, see page 83. i i v n g C a l l s 31 Dialing a Number In a Text Message To dial a phone number embedded in a text message that you receive:

Additional Dialing Features While dialing (with digits visible in the display), you can open the Dialing Menu to perform the following tasks:

RY A To open the Text Msg Menu scroll to Call Back dial the number To attach a number from the phonebook or recent call lists open a new text message with the number in the To eld Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN Press M

> Attach Number M

> Send Message s l l a C g n v i i e c e R d n a g n d n e S i 32 To insert a special character for calls that require additional digits (for example, to make a calling card call, or to retrieve messages from an answering machine):

i e n d n g a n d R e c e RY S A To insert a p (pause) character Your phone dials the preceding digits, waits for the call to connect, then sends the remaining digit(s). insert a w (wait) character Your phone dials the preceding digits, waits for the call to connect, then prompts you for conrmation before it sends the remaining digit(s). insert an n (number) character Your phone prompts you for a number before dialing the call. The number you enter is inserted into the dialing sequence in place of the n character v n g C a l l i i Press M > Insert Pause M > Insert Wait M > Insert 'n'

PRELIMIN s 33 You can also call a number using these features:

To Call a phonebook entry using voice dial See Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry on page 70. RY A a missed call, or a recent received or dialed call Do This Press and release the voice key, then speak a voice name (in two seconds). Voice key Press M > Recent Calls

> Received Calls or Dialed Calls > entry to call PRELIMIN s l l a C g n v i i e c e R d n a g n d n e S i 34 Using Features While On a Call Using Call Waiting When you are on a call, an alert tone sounds to indicate that you have received a second call. To answer the second call:

RY U A s n g F e a t u r e s W h i To answer the new call switch back to the rst call Making a Three-Way Call During a call, you can call and connect a third party for a three-way call. You cannot do this if you already have a call on hold. Press 1 N 2 N PRELIMIN Press 1 keypad keys 2 N 3 N 4 O To enter the third partys number call the new person connect the two calls end the entire call i l e O n a C a l l 35 Additional On-Call Features To mute the call RY A activate an attached speakerphone

(hands-free mode) view your phone number send a number to the network as DTMF tones

(for credit card or password calls) To activate DTMF tones, see the DTMF option on page 60. view recent received or dialed call numbers view or send messages view datebook entries view phone specications Press MUTE (+) (if available) or M > Mute SPEAKER (+) (if available) or M > Spkrphone On M > My Tel. Number M > Send Tones PRELIMIN M > Received Calls or Dialed Calls M > Messages M > Datebook M

> Other Information l l a C a n O e l i h W s e r u t a e F g n s U i 36 Using the Menu Navigating to a Feature Use these keys to move through the menu system:

RY U A s n g t h e M e n u i Right Soft Key Perform the function shown in the lower right corner of the display

(usually SELECT the highlighted menu item). Scroll Keys Move up or down through menus and lists.

* and #

Cycle through and set the value of the highlighted menu item. 37 EXIT SELECT Main Menu Recent Calls Phonebook Left Soft Key Perform the function shown in the lower left corner of the display (usually EXIT or BACK). Menu Key Enter the menu system, or open a sub-menu, when M appears in the bottom center of the display. PRELIMIN End Key Exit the menu system without making changes, return to the idle display. Selecting a Feature Option Some features require you to select an item from a list:

Press BACK (-) to go back to the previous screen. Dialed Calls 10) John Smith 9) Mary Smith BACK M Highlighted item RY A VIEW Press VIEW (+) to view details of the highlighted item. Press S to scroll up or down to highlight the item you want. In a numbered list, press a number key to highlight the item. In an alphabetized list, press a key multiple times to cycle through the letters on the key and highlight the closest matching list item. Press M to open the sub-menu. PRELIMIN u n e M e h t g n s U i 38 Entering Feature Information Some features require you to enter information :

Press S to scroll down to additional items. Entry Details Name:John Smith No.:2125551212 CANCEL CHANGE Highlighted item RY U A Press CHANGE (+) to edit the information. s n g t h e M e n u i Enter numbers or text with the keypad. When an item has a list of possible values, press

* or # to scroll through and select a value. When an item has a list of possible numeric values, press a number key to set the value. If you enter or edit information and do not want to save your changes, press O to exit without saving. Press CANCEL (-) to exit without making changes. DONE (-) appears when you enter or edit information. PRELIMIN 39 The message center lets you compose and send text messages. A ashing cursor shows where text will appear:

When you enter text, the ashing cursor changes to a block cursor, and the soft key functions change:

Press BROWSE (+) to view and insert a name, number, or message from previously stored information. RY A BROWSE Press OK (+) to accept and store the text. Press DELETE (-) to delete the character to the left of the insertion point. Flashing cursor indicates insertion point. Msg:

CANCEL M Press M to open the sub-menu. Press CANCEL (-) to exit without making changes. Msg:

T Block cursor indicates current highlighted character. PRELIMIN After two seconds, the block cursor reverts to a ashing cursor and moves to the next position. DELETE M OK u n e M e h t g n s U i 40 Entering Text Multiple text entry methods make it easy for you to enter names, numbers, email addresses, and text messages on your phone. Choosing a Text Mode Press M from any text entry screen to select the text mode from the Entry Method menu:

RY E A n t e r i n g T e x t iTAP Numeric Symbol Browse Let the phone predict each word as you enter it (see page 46). Tap Method Enter letters, numbers, and symbols by pressing a key one or more times (see page 42). Enter numbers only. Enter symbols only (see page 45). Browse your phonebook or recent call lists to select a name or number. PRELIMIN Note: The text mode you select remains active until you change it by selecting another mode. 41 Tap Method This is the standard mode for entering text on your phone. Press M from any text entry screen and select the Tap Method menu option. RY A To select a letter, number, or symbol shown in the Character Chart on page 44 enter the remaining characters store the text when you are nished Do This 1 Press a number key one or more times 2 Continue 3 Press OK (+) pressing number keys PRELIMIN t x e T g n i r e t n E 42 General Text Entry Rules Press a number key repeatedly to cycle through its characters (see Character Chart on page 44):

To change a letter in a block cursor to uppercase or lowercase when using tap method:

Press these keys. RY E A n t e r i n g T e x t To move the ashing cursor left or right in numeric mode:

Press these keys. To move the ashing cursor left or right when using tap method:

Press these keys. To enter text at ashing cursor location:

Press a number key (as many times as necessary to enter the desired character). Msg BROWSE CANCEL To cycle between tap method and numeric mode:

Press and hold a number key. PRELIMIN If you do not press a key for two seconds, the character in the block cursor is accepted, and the cursor moves to the next position. 43 The rst character of every sentence is capitalized.

(Press S down to force the character to lowercase while it is highlighted by the block cursor). Your phone may support multiple languages. The current language setting determines whether a new message begins on the left or right side of the display. You can switch languages within a message. Press M to select the text mode and language you want to use. RY A 1 Character Chart Use this chart as a guide for entering spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols with the tap method. space . 1 ? ! , @ _ & ~ : ; "

a b c 2 d e f 3 g h i 4 j k l 5 PRELIMIN 2 3 4 5 6 m n o 6 p q r s 7 7 t u v 8 8 9 w x y z 9 0

+ - 0 x * / \ [ ] = > < #

Note: This chart may not reect the exact character set available on your phone. t x e T g n i r e t n E 44 Symbol Mode Press M from any text entry screen and select the Symbol menu option. Do This 1 Press a number key one time 2 Press * or #

or To display its symbol options at the bottom of the display (see Symbol Chart on page 45) highlight the symbol you want RY E A n t e r i n g T e x t enter the symbol at the ashing cursor location Symbol Chart Use this chart as a guide for entering symbols in symbol mode. 3 Press SELECT (+) Press the number key multiple times PRELIMIN 2 @ _ \

3 4 5 6

1 space . ? ! , @ _

45 t Predictive Text Entry with 7 8 9 0

+ - x * / = > <

RY A iTAP Software iTAP software provides a predictive text entry method that lets you enter the letters of a word using only one keypress per letter. Press M from any text entry screen and select the iTAP menu option. Enter Words Do This 1 Press a number PRELIMIN 2 Press number keys (one per letter) key one time To enter the rst letter of the word The letters associated with the key are shown at the bottom of the display. enter the rest of the word Alternative words and letter combinations are shown at the bottom of the display. The word choices are updated with each keypress. x e T g n i r e t n E 46 Do This 3 Press * or # lhighlight the word you want 4 Press To SELECT (+) enter the word at the ashing cursor location A space is automatically inserted after the word. For example, to spell the word act, press 2 2 8. The display shows:

RY E A Press S to scroll and see additional word choices. n t e r i n g T e x t Press SELECT (+) to insert the highlighted word at the insertion point. Flashing cursor indicates insertion point. Act Cat Bat Abu }

SELECT DELETE Press DELETE (-) to clear the last letter entered. PRELIMIN Do This 1 Press DELETE (-) one or more times Enter Novel Words You may enter a word that is not in the iTAP software dictionary. If the word you want is not displayed:

To delete letters until you see a letter combination that matches the start of the word 47 Do This 2 Press * or # highlight the letter or To letter combination shift the text entry cursor to the left and lock the selected word portion spell the word RY A To enter punctuation or other characters as shown in the Character Chart on page 44 3 Press SELECT (+), then press *

4 Continue to enter letters and highlight letter combinations Punctuation Press 0 or 1 PRELIMIN Press S Capitalization The rst word of a sentence is automatically capitalized, with following words in lowercase. To change the words to initial character capitalized, all uppercase characters, or all lowercase characters t x e T g n i r e t n E 48 Enter Numbers Do This 1 Enter the rst digit and then highlight it 2 Press number keys 3 Press SELECT (+) To put the iTAP software in number entry mode add digits to the number enter the number at the ashing cursor location RY E A n t e r i n g T e x t To delete one letter at a time delete the entire message Delete Letters and Words Place the cursor to the right of the text you want to delete, and then do the following:

Do This Press DELETE (-) Hold DELETE (-) PRELIMIN 49 Menu Feature Descriptions This chapter describes all of your phones features in order of the menu map shown on pages 34. Main Menu RECENT CALLS Received Calls M > Recent Calls RY A

> Received Calls View a list of recently received calls. See Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List on page 63. Dialed Calls M > Recent Calls

> Dialed Calls View a list of recently dialed calls. See Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List on page 63. PRELIMIN Notepad Call or store the last number entered on the keypad. See Terminating an Incoming Call on page 30 and Using the Notepad on page 64. View call timers that track time spent on your last call, dialed calls, received calls, all calls since reset, and all calls total. See Viewing and Resetting Call Timers on page 65. Call Times M > Recent Calls

> Call Times M > Recent Calls

> Notepad s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 50 PHONEBOOK M > Phonebook Store names and numbers as entries in your phonebook, then call numbers by selecting them from the phonebook list. See Phonebook on page 67. DATEBOOK M > Datebook Use the datebook calendar to schedule and review your appointments. See Datebook on page 75. QUICK DIAL M > Quick Dial RY M A Dial pre-programmed numbers. Your service provider may program your phone with one or more quick dial numbers, such as the customer service number. You can call them by selecting them from the quick dial list. Note: Your service provider may use a different name for this feature. e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s RADIO M > Radio PRELIMIN Listen to FM radio stations with the optional Motorola Original FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory. This menu feature is displayed only when the FM Stereo Radio Headset is plugged into the accessory connector port on your phone. See Radio on page 80. 51 MESSAGES M > Messages Adjust message settings, view and manage the various types of messages your phone can receive and/or send:

Text Msgs RY A Send and manage text messages. See MessagesText on page 85. Create new text messages. See Sending a Text Message on page 91. Listen to your recorded voice messages. See MessagesVoicemail on page 83. received by your micro-browser. Select and send pre-written messages from the quick notes list. See Sending a Quick Note Text Message on page 93. View all outgoing text messages, delivered and undelivered. Create Msg Voicemail PRELIMIN Quick Notes Outbox Browser Alerts Read alert messages s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 52 Store and edit text messages that you have written but not sent. Drafts RING STYLES Style e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s M > Ring Styles

> My Tones M > Ring Styles

> Style RY M A Select the ring style your phone uses to notify you of incoming calls, messages, or other events. See Ring Styles on page 95. Style Detail M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail Change details about the current ring style. Style represents the name of the ring style. See Ring Styles on page 95. Create custom alert tones for your phone. See Using My Tones on page 97. M > Shortcuts Create keypad or voice shortcuts to menu features. See Shortcuts on page 104. SHORTCUTS My Tones PRELIMIN VOICE NOTES M > Voice Notes Use the voice key to record messages and phone calls. See Voice Notes on page 107. Note: Recording phone calls is subject to varying state and federal laws regarding privacy and recording of conversations. 53 BROWSER M > Browser Access Web pages and run Web-based applications. The micro-browser delivers WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) pages from your service provider directly to your phone. See Micro-Browser on page 113. CALCULATOR M > Calculator Use your phone as a calculator or currency converter. See Calculator on page 116. RY A Play games on your phone. See Games on page 119. GAMES Settings Menu PHONE STATUS My Tel. Number M > Settings M > Games PRELIMIN Active Line M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Active Line

> Phone Status

> My Tel. Number View, enter, and edit information about your name and phone number. Change the active phone line to send and receive calls from either of the available numbers. s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 54 Battery Meter M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Battery Meter View a detailed battery charge meter. Other Information M > Settings

> Phone Status

Other Informatio n RY M A View your phones feature specications

(if available from the service provider).

> Connection

> Incoming Call Connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device to send and receive data calls on the connected device. See Data Calls on page 131. Incoming Call M > Settings CONNECTION PRELIMIN IN-CALL SETUP In-Call Timer M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> In-Call Timer Specify the format for the next incoming call. You can select Data In Only or Normal. See Receiving a Data Call on page 134. Set the features that are active during a call, such as the in-call timer and call answering options. Adjust call timer Display and Beep settings. You can set your timer to beep at a selected interval during e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 55 your calls. (60 seconds is the default.) You can also turn on or off a display timer during calls as follows:

Display the elapsed time for the current call. No in-call timer display. Time Off Answer Options M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> Answer Options RY A Turn call answering options on or off:

Multi-Key Answer by pressing any key. Phone Lock M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock Lock and unlock your phone. See Locking and Unlocking Your Phone on page 139. Lock Keypad M > Settings > Security

> Lock Keypad SECURITY PRELIMIN Lock and unlock specic phone applications (such as phonebook or datebook). When an application is locked, users must enter the unlock code to use the application. View instructions on how to lock and unlock your keypad. See Locking and Unlocking Your Keypad on page 140. Lock Application M > Settings > Security

> Lock Application s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 56 Talk Secure M > Settings > Security

> Talk Secure Activate a secure connection to prevent others from intercepting your calls. See Talk Secure on page 29 and Activating Talk Secure on page 141. Restrict Calls M > Settings > Security

> Restrict Calls RY M A Restrict incoming and outgoing calls. See Restricting Calls on page 140. New Passwords M > Settings > Security

> New Passwords Change your unlock code (originally set to 1234) or your security code (originally set to 000000). See Assigning a New Code or Password on page 137. Personalize M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Personalize Set several personal phone options:

OTHER SETTINGS PRELIMIN Main Menu Keys Change the order of the main menu. See Reordering Menu Items on page 125. Change the functions of the soft keys in the idle display. See Customizing a Soft Key Function on page 125. e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 57 Greeting Quick Dial Change the text displayed when you turn on your phone. Change quick dial number(s). RY A

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup Initial Setup M > Settings Auto PIN Dial Set many basic phone options:

Time and Date PRELIMIN Set the phones time and date. Some networks require an authenticating PIN to allow outgoing calls. Use this feature to automatically dial your PIN. Use this option to turn on or turn off the automatic redial feature. When you turn on automatic redial, your phone automatically redials calls that fail due to busy network conditions. See Using Automatic Redial on page 28. Auto Redial s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 58 RY M A Backlight Zoom TTY Setup Set the amount of time that the display backlight remains on, or turn off the backlight to conserve battery power. Switch between three lines

(Zoom Out) and two lines

(Zoom In) of display text. Set your phone to operate in one of three TTY modes or return to normal Voice mode. See TTY Operation on page 126. Force the cursor to stop or wrap around when it reaches the top or bottom of a list in the display. Turn animation off (to conserve battery power) or on. Animation makes your phones menus move smoothly as you scroll up and down. Set the language for phone menus. Adjust the phones power usage characteristics to conserve power. Scroll Animation PRELIMIN Battery Save Language e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s 59 Contrast DTMF RY A Adjust the contrast setting for your display. Your phone can send a number to the network as dual tone multi-frequency

(DTMF) tones. DTMF tones are used to communicate with automated systems that require you to enter a number such as a code, password, or credit card number. Use this option to set DTMF tones on or off. Reset all options back to their original factory settings except for the unlock code, security code, and lifetime timer. Master Reset PRELIMIN s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 60 Master Clear Reset all options back to their original factory settings except for the unlock code, security code, and lifetime timer, and clear all user settings and entries. Note: This option erases all user-entered information stored in your phones memory, including phonebook and datebook entries. Once you erase the information, it cannot be recovered. M > Settings RY M A e n u F e a t u r e D e s c r i p t i o n s

> Other Settings

> Network View and adjust your phones network settings. Your service provider registers your phone to a network. You can view information about the current network, change how your phone searches for a network, and activate alerts that indicate when a call is dropped or network registration changes. Network PRELIMIN Car Settings M > Settings Adjust hands-free car kit settings. You can set your phone to route calls directly to the car kit when it detects a connection, and

> Other Settings

> Car Settings 61 automatically answer calls after two rings. See Hands-Free Use on page 128. Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the laws and regulations on the use of these products. Headset M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Headset RY A Set your phone to automatically answer calls after two rings when connected to a headset. See Hands-Free Use on page 128. PRELIMIN s n o i t p i r c s e D e r u t a e F u n e M 62 Recent Calls Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List Your phone keeps a list of the calls you recently received and dialed, even if the calls did not connect. Find the Feature M > Recent Calls RY R A e c e n t C a l l s Press 1 S To scroll to Received Calls or Dialed Calls select the list scroll to an entry Note: < means the call connected. call the entrys number view entry details 4 N or 2 SELECT (+) 3 S PRELIMIN VIEW (+) or M open the Last Calls Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list 63 The Last Calls Menu includes the following options:

Option Store Delete Delete All Send Message s Description Create a phonebook entry with the number in the No. eld. Delete the entry. Delete all entries in the list. Open a new text message with the number in the To eld. Add digits after the number. RY A phonebook or recent call lists, after the highlighted number. Send the number to the network as DTMF tones (for credit card or password calls). Add Digits Attach Number Attach a number from the Send Tones PRELIMIN Using the Notepad Your phone stores the most recent string of digits entered on the keypad in a temporary memory location called the notepad. This can be a phone number that you called, or a number that you entered but did not call. To retrieve the number stored in the notepad:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls

> Notepad l l a C t n e c e R 64 Press N or M or STORE (+) To call the number open the Dialing Menu to attach a number or insert a special character RY R A e c e n t C a l l s create a phonebook entry with the number in the No. eld Viewing and Resetting Call Timers Network connection time is the elapsed time from the moment you connect to your service provider's network to the moment you end the call by pressing O. This time includes busy signals and ringing. The amount of network connection time you track on your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time for which you are billed by your service provider. For billing information, please contact your service provider directly. You can view the following network connection times:

PRELIMIN Description Time spent on the last call dialed or received. You cannot reset this timer. Timer Last Call 65 Timer Dialed Calls Description Total time spent on dialed calls since the last time you reset this timer. All Calls Received Calls Total time spent on calls received since the last time you reset this timer. Total time spent on dialed and received calls since the last time you reset this timer. Total time spent on all calls on this phone. You cannot reset this timer. RY A To view a call timer:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls

> Call Times Lifetime Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN Press 1 RESET (+) 2 YES (-) To reset the call timer:

To reset the time (if available) conrm the reset To scroll to the timer you want\

view the recorded time s l l a C t n e c e R 66 Phonebook You can store a list of names and phone numbers or email addresses in your phones electronic phonebook. To see the names stored in your phonebook, press M > Phonebook from the idle display. Scroll to a name and press VIEW (+) to view details of the phonebook entry as shown in the following display. Fields in a Phonebook Entry RY P A h o n e b o o k Entrys Name Entrys phone number or email address Entrys speed dial number Voice Name indicator indicates a recorded voice name

$*Carlo Emrys 2154337215 Speed No.15 M Type indicator identies number type:

$ Work U Home S Main h Mobile Z Fax p Pager

[ Email PRELIMIN Press M to open the Phonebook Menu Return to list BACK EDIT Edit entry Note: When you set a distinctive ringer alert for a phonebook entry, the Ringer ID setting appears below the speed dial number. 67 k o o b e n o h P Storing a Phonebook Entry A phone number or email address is required for a phonebook entry. All other information is optional. Shortcut: Enter a phone number in the idle display, then press STORE (+) to create a phonebook entry with the number in the No. eld. Go directly to step 3 in the following procedure to continue. Enter Information RY A M > New Press 1 S Find the Feature M > Phonebook 2 SELECT (+) 3 CHANGE (+) 4 keypad keys 5 OK (+) 6 CHANGE (+) 7 keypad keys PRELIMIN To scroll to Phone Number or Email Address select the entry type select Name enter a name for the entry store the name select No. or Email enter the phone number or email address store the phone number or email address select Type Note: This option is not available for email entries. scroll to the number type 9 CHANGE (+) 8 OK (+) 10 S 68 Press 11 SELECT (+) 12 RECORD (+) or Go to step 13 if you do not want a voice name 13 S To select the number type record a voice name for the entry, if desired (see page 70) RY P A h o n e b o o k 15 keypad keys 14 CHANGE (+) 16 OK (+) 17 CHANGE (+) scroll to Speed No. The next available speed dial number is assigned to a new phonebook entry. select Speed No. if you want to change it enter a different speed dial number, if desired store the speed dial number select Ringer ID if you want to assign a distinctive ringer alert for the phone number Your phone uses the alert to notify you when you receive a call from this phone number

(see page 96). scroll to the alert you want PRELIMIN store the ringer ID alert 18 S 19 SELECT (+) 69 Press 20 SELECT (+) To select MORE if you want to create another entry with the same Name RY A Complete Phonebook Entry When you are nished entering information for a phonebook entry:

Press DONE (-) To store the entry Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry You can record a voice name for a new or existing phonebook entry. This lets you call the phonebook entry using the voice dial feature (see page 72). Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. PRELIMIN Do This 1 Press S 2 Press VIEW (+) 3 Press EDIT (+) 4 Press S view entry details edit the entry scroll to Voice Name Find the Feature M > Phonebook To scroll to the entry k o o b e n o h P 70 Do This 5 Press RECORD (+) 6 Press and release To begin recording record the voice name the voice key and say the entrys name (in two seconds) 7 Press and release the voice key and repeat the name 8 Press DONE (-) conrm the voice name RY P A h o n e b o o k store the voice name Dialing a Phonebook Entry You can use the phonebook list, voice dial, speed dial, or one-touch dial to call a number (or send a text message to an email address) stored in your phonebook. To use speed dial, see page 31. To use one-touch dial, see page 31. Phonebook List To call or send email to a phonebook entry:

Find the Feature M > Phonebook PRELIMIN send the call (phone number) or open a new text message with the address in the To eld (email address) To scroll to the entry Press 1 S 2 N 71 Voice Dial To call a number or send an email using voice dial:

Do This Press and release the voice key and say the entrys name (in two seconds). To send the call (phone number) or open a new text message (email address) RY A Editing a Phonebook Entry Find the Feature M > Phonebook To scroll to the entry view entry details edit the entry Press 1 S 2 VIEW (+) 3 EDIT (+) PRELIMIN Press 1 S 2 M 3 S Edit the entry by following the procedures described in Storing a Phonebook Entry on page 68. Deleting a Phonebook Entry Find the Feature M > Phonebook To scroll to the entry open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Delete k o o b e n o h P 72 Press 4 SELECT (+) 5 YES (-) To select Delete conrm the deletion Checking Phonebook Capacity You can see how much memory space is left for storing phonebook and datebook entries on your phone. Find the Feature M > Phonebook RY P A h o n e b o o k select Ph Book Capacity Your phone displays the phone memory meter. To open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Ph Book Capacity Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN Sorting the Phonebook List You can sort your phonebook list by speed dial number

(the standard), name, email address, or voice dial. Tip: The voice dial sort is identical to the name sort, except that entries with voice name tags appear rst. Find the Feature M > Phonebook To open the Phonebook Menu Press 1 M 73 Press 2 S 3 SELECT (+) 4 S 5 CHANGE (+) 6 S 7 SELECT (+) To scroll to Setup select Setup scroll to Sort by select Sort by scroll to the sort order you want select the sort order RY A PRELIMIN k o o b e n o h P 74 Datebook The datebook is a calendar that lets you schedule and organize events such as appointments and meetings. The datebook can also play a reminder alarm for specic events. Note: You must set the correct time and date in order to use the datebook. To schedule or review datebook events:

Find the Feature M > Datebook Week View The datebook initially displays a calendar for the week. Lines or lled boxes indicate scheduled events. RY D A a t e b o o k Untimed event 12 hour window

{ 15 NOV-21 NOV

S M T W T F S PRELIMIN Full day (12-hour) event scheduled VIEW EXIT M Exit the datebook Days of week

(press * or #

to select) One-hour event Go to selected day Press M to open the Datebook Menu 75 Day View Select a day and press VIEW (+) to see the days events. Untimed event Down scroll arrow

{ THU 19-NOV

Joe's B-day 9:00 A Marie,... VIEW M BACK Day of week

Alarm RY A Event Show event details Event View Select an event and press VIEW (+) to see event details. Alarm Press M to open the Datebook Menu Return to previous screen PRELIMIN A THU 9:00am Marie, mtg about new product M BACK EDIT Press M to open the Datebook Menu Return to previous screen Down scroll arrow Day and time Event details Edit event k o o b e t a D 76 Storing a Datebook Event A title is required for a datebook event. All other information is optional. Find the Feature M > Datebook > day M > New RY D A To select Title enter a title for the event store the event title scroll to other elds and enter information as necessary You can set start time, duration, date, repeat interval, and reminder alarm. store the event a t e b o o k Press 1 CHANGE (+) 2 keypad keys 3 OK (+) 4 S Changing Event Information Find the Feature M > Datebook 5 DONE (-) PRELIMIN Press 1 * or #

2 VIEW (+) 3 S 4 VIEW (+) 5 EDIT (+) To scroll to the day display the day view scroll to the event display the event view edit the event 77 k Copying an Event Find the Feature M > Datebook Press 6 S 7 CHANGE (+) 8 keypad keys 9 DONE (-) To scroll to the information you want to change edit the information enter new information store the information RY A To scroll to the day display the day view scroll to the event open the Datebook Menu scroll to Copy copy the event conrm the copy Your phone assumes you want to change the date, and displays the Date eld. enter date information move to month, day, and year save the copy of the event return to the day view Press 1 * or #

2 VIEW (+) 3 S 4 M 5 S 6 SELECT (+) 7 YES (-) PRELIMIN 8 keypad keys 9 } (+) 10 DONE (-) 11 DONE (-) o o b e t a D 78 Deleting an Event Find the Feature M > Datebook Press 1 * or #

2 VIEW (+) 3 S 4 M 5 S 6 SELECT (+) 7 YES (-) To scroll to the day display the day view scroll to the event RY D A a t e b o o k open the Datebook Menu scroll to Delete select Delete conrm the deletion PRELIMIN 79 Radio port. Turning the Radio On and Off You can use your phone to listen to FM radio stations when the optional Motorola Original FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory is plugged into the phones accessory connector RY A To turn the radio on and off Alternatively, you can use the following procedure:

To open the menu scroll to Radio Press Radio (+) Press 1 M 2 S 3 On (+) or PRELIMIN Off (+) Note: The Radio menu feature and soft key options appear only when the FM Stereo Radio Headset is plugged into the accessory connector port. turn the radio on or off i o d a R 80 Tuning a Station Do This Press S To scroll to the next frequency or Press and hold S scroll to the next available stereo station RY R A a d o i To assign its preset number to the tuned station Storing a Preset Selecting a Preset Press a number key

(1 to 9) Do This Press and hold a number key

(1 to 9) PRELIMIN Do This Press IGNORE (-) To ignore the call Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On Your phone rings or vibrates as usual to notify you of an incoming call, message, or other event. To tune the station stored at the preset location 81 Do This Press ANSWER (+) or Press the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone To answer the call Note: You can use the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to converse with the other party during a call RY A To end the call o To end the call and resume the FM broadcast:

i d a R Do This Press O or Press and hold the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone PRELIMIN Turn the radio off before dialing outgoing calls from the phone keypad. You do not have to turn off the radio to dial emergency numbers, or numbers selected from your phonebook or recent call lists. Tip: To dial a recently called number, press N or the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to go to the dialed calls list (see page 63). 82 MessagesVoicemail You can listen to your voicemail messages by calling your network voicemail phone number. Voicemail messages are stored on the networknot on your phone. RY M A Storing Your Voicemail Number Storing your voicemail number on your phone makes it easy for you to listen to new voicemail messages. In many cases, your service provider has already done this for you. Find the Feature M > Messages M > VoiceMail Setup To enter your voicemail number store the number Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) PRELIMIN Your service provider additionally may store your voicemail number as phonebook entry number 1, so you can use one-touch dial to listen to your voicemail messages. If necessary, see Storing a Phonebook Entry on page 68 to store your voicemail number for one-touch dial access. e s s a g e s V o c e m a i i l 83 RY A Receiving a Voicemail Message When you receive a voicemail message, your phone displays the & (voice message waiting) indicator and a New VoiceMail notication. Do This Press CALL (+) To listen to the message If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder at regular intervals until you close the new message notication, listen to the message, or turn off your phone. Listening to a Voicemail Message Find the Feature M > Messages > VoiceMail The phone calls your voicemail number. If no voicemail number is stored, your phone prompts you to store one. Shortcut: If your voicemail number is also stored as phonebook entry number 1, you can press and hold 1 to listen to your voicemail message(s). PRELIMIN l i i a m e c o V s e g a s s e M 84 MessagesText RY M A e s s a g e s T e x t Text messages are brief messages that you can send and receive. Quick notes are pre-written text messages that you can customize and send quickly. Your text message inbox must be set up before you can send and receive messages. The number of messages the inbox can hold depends on the length of the messages, and the number of other messages and drafts stored on your phone. Setting Up the Text Message Inbox Note: In many cases, your service provider has already set up the text message inbox for you. Find the Feature M > Messages PRELIMIN To change the Srvce Center No. enter the phone number for the service that handles your outgoing messages store the number change the Expire After period Press 1 CHANGE (+) 2 keypad keys 3 OK (+) 4 CHANGE (+) M > Text Msg Setup 85 RY A To enter the expiration period the number of days your network tries to send unreceived messages store the expiration period change the Cleanup setting scroll to the number of days you want to keep messages in the inbox, or the number of messages you want to keep select the cleanup setting change the SMS Alert setting select whether you want incoming message alerts turned On or Off while you are on a voice call select the SMS Alert setting save the inbox settings Press 5 keypad keys 6 OK (+) 7 CHANGE (+) 8 S 12 SELECT (+) 13 DONE (-) 9 SELECT (+) 10 CHANGE (+) 11 S PRELIMIN Receiving a Text Message Note: Your text message inbox must be set up before you can receive text messages (see page 85). t x e T s e g a s s e M 86 When you receive a text message, your phone displays the X (message waiting) indicator and a New Message notication. Press READ (+) To open the message RY M A e s s a g e s T e x t If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder at regular intervals until you close the new message notication, read the message, or turn off your phone. When your phone displays Memory is Full!, you must delete some existing messages to receive new messages. Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message Messages in the text message inbox are sorted from newest to oldest. The oldest messages are deleted automatically as specied by the inbox cleanup setting

(see page 85). If you want to save a message, you should lock it to prevent it from being deleted during cleanup. Find the Feature M > Messages

> Text Msgs PRELIMIN 87 Press 1 S To scroll to the message The following indicators show message status:

Y = unread d = unread and urgent n = read f = read and locked open the message close the message RY A compose and send a reply 2 READ (+) 3 SAVE (-) The Text Msg Menu includes the following options:

open the Text Msg Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list or REPLY (+) or M PRELIMIN Reply Description Delete the message. Option Delete Create Message Open a new text message. Call Back Call the number in the message header or embedded in the message. Open a new text message with the senders Reply To number or email address in the To eld. t x e T s e g a s s e M 88 Option Forward Lock/Unlock Store Number Description Open a copy of the text message with an empty To eld. Lock or unlock the message. Create a phonebook entry with the embedded number in the No. eld. Delete all inbox messages. RY M A e s s a g e s T e x t Setup Delete All Store Address Create a phonebook entry with the embedded email address in the Email eld.. Open the text message inbox setup menu. Storing Sounds From a Text Message You can receive a text message with inserted sounds

(such as music or alert tones). You can store these sounds on your phone. Select a Sound File PRELIMIN To scroll to and highlight the inserted sound le open the Text Msg Menu scroll to Store 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) Press 1 S display a list of message items that can be stored 89 Press 5 S 6 SELECT (+) Store a Sound File To store the sound le:

To scroll to File Attachment display the sound le RY A To view storage options scroll to Store Only store the sound to your My Tones list (see page 97) To set the sound as an alert tone for a specic event:

Press 1 STORE (+) 2 S 3 SELECT (+) Press 1 STORE (+) 2 S 3 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN 4 S 5 SELECT (+) To view storage options scroll to Set As Ring Tone set the sound as an alert Your phone displays Set As Which?, and lists the available event types scroll to the eventt store the sound and set it as the event alert t x e T s e g a s s e M 90 Sending a Text Message You can send a text message to one or more recipients. You can manually enter each recipients phone number or email address, or select numbers/

addresses from the phonebook or recent call lists. Note: When you manually enter numbers and/or email addresses, you must insert a space between each entry. Press 1 one time, wait for the space to appear, then enter the next number or email address. Find the Feature M > Messages RY M A

> Create Message e s s a g e s T e x t Press 1 CHANGE (+) 2 keypad keys To select To enter one or more phone numbers and/or email addresses Tip: Press 1 to insert a space between each number/address that you enter manually. PRELIMIN select numbers/addresses from the phonebook or recent call lists store the numbers/addresses select Msg BROWSE (+) 3 OK (+) 4 CHANGE (+) or 91 Press 5 keypad keys 6 OK (+) 7 CHANGE (+) 8 S 9 SELECT (+) 10 CHANGE (+) 11 keypad keys To enter the message Note: Message length is limited.A counter at the top of the display shows how many characters are left. store the message select Priority scroll to the priority you want RY A 12 OK (+) 13 CHANGE (+) 14 S PRELIMIN set the priority select Call enter a number for the recipient to call back store the number select Receipt select whether you want the message status to be updated when the recipient opens the message Note: Sent messages are stored in your outbox. See page 94. store your receipt preference nish the message 15 OK (+) 16 DONE (-) t x e T s e g a s s e M 92 To send the message Press 17 YES (-) or NO (+) cancel the message or save it in the drafts folder Sending a Quick Note Text Message Quick notes are pre-written messages that you can edit and send quickly (for example, Meet me at ...). You can also create and store new quick notes. Find the Feature M > Messages RY M A e s s a g e s T e x t

> Quick Notes To scroll to the quick note read the quick note Press 1 S 2 READ (+) PRELIMIN or M Option New Edit Description Create a new quick note. Edit the quick note. open the Quick Note Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list The Quick Note Menu includes the following options:

93 Option Delete Send Description Delete the quick note. Open a new message with the quick note in the Msg eld. Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages Messages that you send are stored in the outbox. Find the Feature M > Messages > Outbox RY A Messages in the outbox are sorted from newest to oldest. The following indicators show message status:

= sending in progress Y = delivered m = sending failed n = read by recipient PRELIMIN t x e T s e g a s s e M 94 Ring Styles Your phone rings or vibrates to notify you of an incoming call or other event. This ring or vibration is called an alert. You can select one of ve different ring styles:

x = soft ring u = ring and vibrate RY R A n g S t y e s i l w = loud ring y = vibrate t = silent The ring style indicator in the display shows the current ring style (see page 23). Each ring style contains settings for specic event alerts, ringer ID, and ringer and keypad volume. Selecting a Ring Style Find the Feature M > Ring Styles > Style PRELIMIN Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to the ring style select the ring style 95 Customizing a Ring Style RY A Change Style Settings You can change the alerts that notify you of the following events: incoming calls, text messages, voicemail messages, data calls, fax calls, alarms, and reminders. Any changes you make are saved to the current ring style. Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail Note: Style represents the current ring style. To scroll to the event select the event scroll to the alert you want select the alert Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN Activate and Deactivate Ringer IDs When ringer IDs are turned on, your phone uses distinctive ringer alerts to notify you of incoming calls or messages from specic entries stored in your phonebook. To assign a ringer ID to a phonebook entry, see page 68. Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail l s e y t S g n R i 96 Note: Style represents the current ring style. To scroll to Ringer IDs Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 SELECT (+) change the ringer IDs setting scroll to On or Off select the option RY R A n g S t y e s i l Set Ringer or Keypad Volume Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail Note: Style represents the current ring style. To scroll to Ring Volume or Key Volume scroll to the desired volume conrm the new volume Press 1 S 2 * or #

3 OK (+) PRELIMIN Using My Tones You can create and store up to 32 custom alert tones on your phone. The tones appear in the list of available alerts. Create a Tone Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> My Tones 97 Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) 3 CHANGE (+) 4 keypad keys 5 OK (+) 6 CHANGE (+) 7 keypad keys 8 OK (+) 9 DONE (-) To scroll to [New Tone]

select [New Tone]

select Notes enter notes (see page 98) store the notes select Name enter a name for the tone store the name store the tone RY A Enter Notes Use the keypad keys to enter each note. Press a key multiple times to cycle through its notes or options (pitch, octave, or length). The default setting for a new tone is a quarter note in octave two. PRELIMIN Key 1 2 3 1 2 3 A B C D E F set octave one set octave two set octave three note A note B note C note D note E note F Phone Display Description l s e y t S g n R i 98 Phone Display Description Key 4 7 0 G R

b q h w note G rest sharp at quarter note or rest half note or rest whole note or rest RY R A n g S t y e s i l Enter a note as follows:

Task Change the octave Select the note

(required) Change a note to a sharp or at Action Set the new octave (1, 2, or 3) before selecting the note. The octave applies to all following notes until you change it again. Press a keypad key. PRELIMIN Enter a sharp or at (# or b) after selecting the note. Some sharps and ats are played as standard notes. For example, B# is the same as C. Press S to scroll to valid notes when entering a new note. Set the new length (q, h, or w) after selecting the note. The length applies to all following notes until you change it again. Change a notes length 99 Task Add a rest Listen to a new tone as you compose it Action Enter one or more rests (R characters) as needed in the tone sequence. Set the length of the rest by entering a q, h, or w character after the rest, just as you would for a note. Press M to enter the Compose Menu, and select Play All to play the notes you have entered. RY A Example Press the following keys to play this sequence of notes and rests in octave three: C (quarter note), E at (quarter note), half rest, and G (whole note):

To Press 1 1 1 1 PRELIMIN 3 3 3 7 7 enter a 2 2 2 2 rest set octave three enter a quarter note C 4 4 4 0 0 enter a half quarter note E at Phone Display 3 C Eb Rh l s e y t S g n R i 100 Press To 5 4 0 0 0 enter a whole note G Phone Display Gw Play a Tone Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> My Tones To scroll to the tone RY R A n g S t y e s i l open the My Tones Menu scroll to Play select Play play the tone again Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) 5 PLAY (+) or CANCEL (-) PRELIMIN Press 1 S 2 EDIT (+)

> My Tones To scroll to the tone open the tone details Edit a Tone You cannot edit the predened alert tones included with your phone. To edit a custom alert tone:

Find the Feature M > Ring Styles return to my tones list 101 Press 3 S 4 CHANGE (+) 5 keypad keys 6 OK (+) s Delete a Tone l e y t S g n R i You cannot delete the predened alert tones included with your phone. To delete a custom alert tone:

Find the Feature M > Ring Styles To scroll to the item you want to edit (Name or Notes) select the item enter new text or notes store the tone RY A

> My Tones To scroll to the tone open the My Tones Menu scroll to Delete select Delete conrm the deletion Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) 5 YES (-) PRELIMIN Download a Tone You can download custom alert tones from the micro-browser application, or from a text message. To download tones from the micro-browser, see page 114. To download tones from a text message, see page 89. 102 Setting Reminders A reminder is an alert that rings or vibrates at regular intervals to notify you about a voicemail or text message that you have received, or a datebook event that you have scheduled. Find the Feature M > Ring Styles

> Style Detail

> Reminders Note: Style represents the current ring style. RY R A n g S t y e s i l To scroll to Beep or Vibrate to set the reminder alert type, or Off to turn off all reminders select the reminder alert Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN 103 Shortcuts Your phone includes several standard shortcuts. You can create additional shortcuts to frequently used menu items. RY A Standard Shortcuts The following shortcuts are pre-programmed in your phone. You cannot edit or delete these shortcuts. To zoom in/out on your phone display lock/unlock your keypad display your phone number go to the dialed calls list Do This Press M, then press and hold M

(within two seconds) Press M *

Press M #

Press N PRELIMIN Press O Creating a Shortcut You can create a keypad shortcut plus an optional voice shortcut to a menu item. A voice shortcut takes you directly to the menu item when you say the shortcut name. Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. exit the menu system s t u c t r o h S 104 To Do This 1 Press M enter the menu system 2 Press S scroll to the menu item 3 Press and hold M open the shortcut editor 4 Press YES (-) 5 Press CHANGE (+) view shortcut options change the keypad shortcut number RY S A h o r t c u t s select the default keypad shortcut number or Press DONE (-) or Press S 6 Press RECORD (+) PRELIMIN the voice key and say the shortcuts name

(in two seconds) 8 Press and release the voice key and repeat the name 9 Press DONE (-) 7 Press and release scroll to Voice to assign a voice shortcut begin recording The phone displays Press Voice Key then say voice shortcut. record the shortcut name conrm the shortcut name store the shortcut name 105 Using Shortcuts Use a Keypad Shortcut Press 1 M 2 the keypad shortcut number To open the menu go to the menu item or perform the menu action RY A

> the shortcut you want To open the menu go to the menu item or perform the menu action Select a Shortcut From the List Find the Feature M > Shortcuts Use a Voice Shortcut Do This 1 Press M 2 Press and release PRELIMIN the voice key and say the shortcuts name

(in two seconds) s t u c t r o h S 106 Voice Notes You can use the voice note feature to record personal messages and phone calls on your phone. Recording a Voice Note Use this procedure to record a voice note from the idle display, or to record a phone call in progress. Your phone plays an alert tone to notify the other party that the call is being recorded. Note: Recording phone calls is subject to varying state and federal laws regarding privacy and recording of conversations. Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. RY V A o c e N o t e s i Do This 1 Press and hold the PRELIMIN 2 Speak your voice note while continuing to hold the voice key. 3 Release the voice key to stop recording. voice key. Result The phone sounds an alert tone and begins recording. The phone records the voice note. The phone displays the voice note number and total recording time. 107 Viewing the Voice Notes List Find the Feature M > Voice Notes Locked voice note Down scroll arrow Time/date recorded Play the highlighted voice note RY A PLAY f Voice Notes 2)2:20pm 6/1/00 1)4:05am 4/1/00 EXIT M Press M to open the Voice Notes Menu Return to previous screen PRELIMIN s e t o N e c o V i 108 Playing a Voice Note Find the Feature M > Voice Notes Press 1 S 2 PLAY (+) To scroll to the voice note play the voice note RY V A o c e N o t e s i When you connect an optional Motorola Original headset or FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory to your phone, playback is automatically routed to the headset. Tip: You can play a voice note while taking a call. It will not be transmitted to the other party. Playback Screen The playback screen is displayed while the voice note plays. Indicates

% played PRELIMIN Press M to open the Voice Notes Menu Voice Note 3 SAVE M

Return to previous screen Press *

to rewind DELETE Voice note number Press # to fast forward Erase voice note 109 Voice Note Controls Stop playback and go to Voice Notes Menu. Raise or lower playback volume of voice note. If voice note is unlocked, stop playback and display Delete Voice Note?

RY A If voice note is locked, stop playback and unlock voice note. Stop playback and return to voice notes list. Stop playback and scroll up/down to next voice note. PRELIMIN Rewind three seconds, resume playing. When playback is complete, press to restart. Press and hold to rewind to the beginning. Press any number to alternately stop and start playback. Fast forward three seconds, resume playing. Press and hold to fast forward to end. s e t o N e c o V i 110 Locking and Unlocking a Voice Note Lock a voice note to prevent it from being deleted. You must unlock a voice note to delete it. Find the Feature M > Voice Notes To scroll to the voice note RY V A o c e N o t e s i open the Voice Notes Menu scroll to Lock or Unlock lock or unlock the voice note To lock or unlock a voice note during playback:

Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN To open the Voice Notes Menu scroll to Lock or Unlock lock or unlock the voice note Playback stops when you lock or unlock a voice note. Press any number key to resume playback. 111 Deleting a Voice Note Find the Feature M > Voice Notes Press 1 S 2 M 3 S 4 SELECT (+) 5 YES (-) To scroll to the voice note you want to delete open the Voice Notes Menu scroll to Delete or Delete All RY A select the highlighted option conrm the deletion Notes:

Press NO (+) to cancel deletion. You cannot delete a locked voice note. You cannot recover a deleted voice note. PRELIMIN s e t o N e c o V i 112 Micro-Browser The micro-browser lets you access Web pages and Web-based applications on your phone. Contact your service provider to set up access, if necessary. Starting a Micro-Browser Session Find the Feature M > Browser RY M A B r o w s e r c r o

i To scroll to a bookmark, service, or application select the item If you are unable to establish a network connection with the micro-browser, contact your service provider. Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN 113 Interacting With Web Pages Press S SELECT (+) N RY A To scroll through text, or highlight a selectable item select the highlighted item call the highlighted phone number from the micro-browser enter information Press * to delete one letter at a time if you make a mistake. go back to the previous page open the Browser Menu keypad keys, followed by OK (+)

M PRELIMIN Press 1 STORE (+) 2 S Downloading a Sound File You can use the micro-browser to download sound les onto your phone. To download a sound le from a Web page, select its link. The sound begins to play when downloading is complete. Store the Sound File To view storage options scroll to Store Only r e s w o r B

o r c M i 114 Press 3 SELECT (+) Set the Sound File As An Alert You can use the sound as an alert tone to notify you of an incoming call or other event. To store the sound Your phone adds the sound to the My Tones list. RY M A B r o w s e r c r o

i To view storage options scroll to Set As Ring Tone set the sound as an alert scroll to the event store the sound and set it as the event alert The event alert setting is saved to the current ring style Press 1 STORE (+) 2 S 3 SELECT (+) 4 S 5 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN For more information about using sounds and alert tones, see page 97. 115 Calculator You can use your phone as a calculator and currency converter. Calculating Numbers RY A To enter a number highlight a calculator function perform the function Press 1 number keys 2 * or #

3 SELECT (+) Selected function appears here Press * or

# to highlight a function Calculator PRELIMIN Press M to open the Calculator Menu

. EXIT C = + - x M Exit the calculator 0

SELECT Entered number Press * or

# to scroll to other functions Perform the highlighted function r o t a u c l l a C 116 The calculator can perform the following functions:

Function

. C CE

x

l a RY C A Description Insert a decimal point Clear the calculation Clear entry (replaces C when you enter subsequent values in a calculation) Calculate the result Add Subtract Multiply Divide Divide the displayed value by 100 Change the entrys sign

(positive/negative) Calculate the exchange rate Store the value in memory (overwrites current stored value) Clear the value stored in memory Replace the displayed value with the value stored in memory c u a t o r l

MS MC MR PRELIMIN 117 Converting Currency The currency converter works just like the calculator, but uses the $ (currency) function:

Find the Feature M > Calculator M > Exchange Rate RY A To enter the exchange rate store the exchange rate enter the amount to convert

(amount to multiply by the exchange rate) highlight the $ function perform the conversion Press 1 number keys 2 OK (+) 3 number keys 4 * or #

5 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN r o t a u c l l a C 118 Games You can play games with your phone between phone calls. An incoming call, message, alarm, or alert automatically ends the game. Playing a Game Find the Feature M > Games RY G A a m e s To start another session of the same game end the game session To scroll to a game start the game When the game is over:

Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) Press NEW (+) or YES (+) BACK (-) or NO (-) PRELIMIN Option Game Sounds New Game Description Switch game sounds on/off. Start a new game session. Game Options Press M to select the following options during a game:

119 Option Key Configuration Assign game functions to Description different keypad keys. Review the goal of the game. Help Blackjack RY A In this classic card game, you play against the dealer to see who can get closer to 21 points without going over. Rules of the Game Face cards count as 10 points. Number cards count You start a new game with 100 credits. You must bet from 1-10 credits for each hand you play. Press DEAL (+) to start a new hand. The rst card is dealt to the dealer. The dealers cards are shown at the top of the display, and your cards are shown at the bottom. as the points shown on their face. PRELIMIN that totals 21 points. An ace counts as 11 points, unless that would put you over 21 points. Otherwise, an ace is counted as 1 point. An ace that is originally counted as 11 may later be counted as 1 if it will bring your total under or equal to 21 points. An initial deal of an ace and a card with a face value of 10 points counts as exactly 21 points or Blackjack. Blackjack automatically wins against any other hand s e m a G 120 If you score more than 21 points, you go bust or lose. If you get ve cards without going bust, you win. If you and the dealer have the same score, the dealer wins. You can ask for a hit or another card as long as you do not go bust. As long as the dealers total is less than 17 points, the dealer must continue to take a hit. RY G A a m e s Press M to select the following options:

How to Play When the game begins, you are dealt two cards. To see the results of the hand request another card Press STAY (-) HIT ME (+) PRELIMIN Option Insurance Double Down Choose Deck Description If the dealers rst card is an ace, pay half of your wager to insure against the dealer winning with Blackjack. Double your initial wager after receiving your rst two cards. Choose the deck image. 121 Falling Numbers Score points by pressing the corresponding number key for numbers as they fall down the display. Rules of the Game If a number reaches the bottom of the display or if you press an incorrect number key, you score one miss. The game is over when you score three misses. The game has ve levels. When you complete a level, play continues automatically at the next level. RY A You earn a bonus if you nish a level without a miss. How to Play When the game begins, numbers start falling from the upper portion of the display. Press the corresponding number key to eliminate a falling number before it reaches the bottom of the display. Press M to set the following options:

PRELIMIN Option Level Top Scores Video Poker Turn 100 credits into 9,999+ credits by making the best possible poker hands. Description Choose the starting level of play. View the top ve scores. s e m a G 122 Rules of the Game You start a new game with 100 credits. You must bet from 1-10 credits for each hand you play. You are dealt ve cards face up, and have one opportunity to trade in cards (zero to ve) for new ones. A winning hand earns credits as listed in the Awards Table. Your credit total is saved when you exit the game. The next time you play, you start with the number of credits that remain from the previous session. The game is over when you lose all of your credits. How to Play Place your initial bet or change your bet (from 1-10 credits) and then:

RY G A a m e s PRELIMIN Press DEAL (+) 4 6 5 or DISCARD (-) DONE (+) To start a new hand select the card to the left select the card to the right discard (cannot be undone) remove discarded cards and deal replacements 123 Press M to select the following options:

Option Change Bet Choose Deck Awards Table Description Change the amount of your bet. Choose the deck image. View the list of odds/payouts for each winning hand. RY A PRELIMIN s e m a G 124 Adjusting Your Settings j d u s t i n g Y o u r S e t t i n g s Reordering Menu Items You can reorder the items in your phones main menu. Find the Feature M > Settings RY A A

> Other Settings

> Personalize

> Main Menu 4 INSERT (+) To scroll to a menu item grab the menu item move the item to a new location in the menu insert the menu item Press 1 S 2 GRAB (+) 3 S PRELIMIN Customizing a Soft Key Function You can relabel the soft keys (- and +) to access different menu items from the idle display. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Personalize > Keys 125 Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 CHANGE (+) s TTY Operation To scroll to Left or Right open the key editor scroll to the new key function conrm the new function RY A You can use an optional TTY device with your phone to send and receive calls. You must plug the TTY device into the phones headset jack and set the phone to operate in one of three TTY modes. Set TTY Mode When you set your phone to a TTY mode, it operates in that mode whenever the TTY device is connected. Find the Feature M > Settings PRELIMIN Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 S 4 SELECT (+)

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup

> TTY Setup To scroll to TTY Setup change the TTY mode scroll to the TTY mode select the TTY mode g n i t t e S r u o Y g n i t s u d A j 126 The TTY Setup menu includes the following options:

Option TTY VCO HCO Voice Description Transmit and receive TTY characters Receive TTY characters but transmit by speaking into the microphone Transmit TTY characters but receive by listening to the earpiece Return to normal voice mode RY A A j When your phone is in a TTY mode, the international TTY symbol and the mode setting are shown in the idle display. You can press TTYMODE (-) to change the mode setting. Switch to TTY Mode During a Voice Call d u s t i n g Y o u r S e t t i n g s To open the Call menu scroll to TTY Setup display the TTY Setup menu scroll to the TTY mode select the TTY mode Press 1 M 2 S 3 SELECT (+) 4 S 5 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN Return to Voice Mode To return to normal voice mode, select Voice from the TTY Setup menu as described on page 126. 127 Hands-Free Use without using your hands. You can purchase an optional Motorola Original hands-free car kit or headset for your phone. These accessories provide alternative ways for you to use your phone RY A Find the Feature M > Settings Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the laws and regulations on the use of these products. Automatic Answer You can set your phone to automatically answer calls after two rings when connected to a car kit or headset. Press 1 S PRELIMIN 2 SELECT (+) 3 S 4 CHANGE (+) 5 S 6 SELECT (+)

> Other Settings To scroll to Car Settings or Headset select the feature scroll to Auto Answer select Auto Answer scroll to On or Off conrm the setting s g n i t t e S r u o Y g n i t s u d A j 128 Automatic Hands-Free You can set your phone to automatically route calls to a car kit when it detects a connection. Find the Feature M > Settings Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+)

> Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Auto Handsfree RY A A To scroll to On or Off conrm the setting j d u s t i n g Y o u r S e t t i n g s Power-Off Delay When your phone is connected to a car kit, you can set it to stay on for a specied time period after you switch off the ignition. This prevents the phone from draining your vehicle battery, but leaves the phone on long enough that you do not have to re-enter your unlock code when making short stops. Find the Feature M > Settings PRELIMIN Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+)

> Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Power-Off Delay To scroll to the time delay conrm your selection 129 Caution: If you select Continuous, the phone does not power off when you turn off the ignition. Be careful not to drain your vehicle battery if you select this option. Charger Time When your phone is connected to a car kit, you can set it to charge itself for a specied time period after you switch off the ignition. This helps ensure that the phone battery gets fully charged while the vehicle is parked. Find the Feature M > Settings RY A

> Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Charger Time To scroll to the charge time conrm your selection Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) PRELIMIN s g n i t t e S r u o Y g n i t s u d A j 130 Data Calls A Motorola Original data kit lets you transfer data between your phone and a computer or other external device. You can:

RY D A a t a C a l l s use your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet. use your phone to send and receive data calls on your computer or hand-held device. Connecting Your Phone to an External Device Connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device using a serial cable or a USB cable. Note: Not all devices are compatible with serial cable or USB cable connections. Check your external device for specications. Set Up a Cable Connection Attach a serial cable or Motorola Original USB cable to the phone and external device as follows. Your phone plays a short tone when the cable connects. Note: Check your computer or hand-held device to determine the type of cable you need. PRELIMIN 131 Attaching a Serial Cable Use the interchangeable head on the Motorola Multi-Connect Serial Cable to connect a computer, Palm III device, or Palm V device to your phone. RY A Do This 1 Plug the serial cable into the detachable head. Make sure that the Motorola logo on the detachable head and the metal shielding on the serial cable plug are both facing you. PRELIMIN logo and the phone both facing you, plug the detachable head into the phones accessory connector port. 2 With the Motorola 3 Plug the other end of the cable into the serial interface connection on the external device and tighten the screws. s l l a C a t a D 132 Attaching a USB Cable Do This 4 Plug the end of the cable with the Motorola logo into the phones accessory connector port. Make sure that the logo and the phone are both facing you. RY D A a t a C a l l s 5 Plug the other endthe USB connectioninto the USB port on the external device. Install the Software Install the software from the CD-ROM that comes with your Motorola Original data kit. See the data kits user guide for more information. Sending a Data Call You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device to send data from the connected device. Use this feature to transfer data from your computer onto another device, and to synchronize phonebook and datebook information between your phone, computer, and/

or hand-held device. PRELIMIN 133 Connect your phone as described on page 131 and do the following:

To 2 Open the application on your computer Do This 1 Check the phone make sure that the phone is connected and powered on place the call through the application (such as dial-up-networking) Note: You cannot dial data numbers through your phones keypad. You must dial them through your computer. close the call and connection when the transfer is complete RY A 3 End the call from the connected device PRELIMIN Receiving a Data Call You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device to receive data. Use this feature to transfer data to your computer from another device. s l l a C a t a D 134 Set Up Your Phone Find the Feature M > Settings

> Connection

> Incoming Call Do This 1 Press CHANGE (+) 2 Press S 3 Press SELECT (+) 4 Connect your phone to the device To select Next Call scroll to Data In Only RY D A set the call format enable the data transfer a t a C a l l s Note: You cannot answer incoming voice calls when your phone is in data mode. Any voice calls you receive are treated as unanswered calls. To return a voice call, reset your phone to voice mode as described on page 136. PRELIMIN Transfer the Data Your phone noties you when the data call arrives, and transfers the call to the connected device. You must use the application running on the connected device to answer the call. End the Data Connection When the data transfer is complete:

To close the connection Do This End the call from the connected device 135 Reset Normal Voice Operation After making a data call, you must reset your phone to resume normal voice operations. You cannot receive voice calls when your phone is in data mode. Find the Feature M > Settings

> Connection

> Incoming Call RY A To select Next Call scroll to Normal reset your phone Your phone also reverts to normal voice operations when you turn it off and then turn it back on. Do This 1 Press CHANGE (+) 2 Press S 3 Press SELECT (+) PRELIMIN s l l a C a t a D 136 Security e c u r i t y Assigning a New Code or Password Your phones unlock code is originally set to 1234, and the security code is originally set to 000000. Your service provider may reset these numbers before you receive your phone. If your service provider has not reset these numbers, we recommend that you change them to prevent other users from accessing your personal information. The unlock code must contain four digits, and the security code must contain six digits. Notes:

RY S A PRELIMIN Your service provider may retain your phones security code for customer service purposes. In this case, you will not be able to use phone features that require you to enter the security code. If the unlock code is the only code you can change, the New Passwords menu is not available. In this case, change the unlock code by selecting: M > Settings

> Security > Phone Lock > Unlock Code. To change a code or password:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> New Passwords 137 Press 1 S 2 CHANGE (+) 3 keypad keys 4 OK (+) 5 keypad keys 6 OK (+) 7 keypad keys 8 OK (+) To scroll to the code or password select the code or password enter your old code submit your old code enter the new code assign the new code re-enter the new code conrm the new code RY A If You Forget a Code or Password If you forget your security code, contact your service provider. If you forget your unlock code, try entering 1234 or the last four digits of your phone number. If that does not work, do the following at the Enter Unlock Code prompt:

PRELIMIN To go to the unlock code bypass screen enter your security code submit your security code 2 keypad keys 3 OK (+) Press 1 M y t i r u c e S 138 Locking and Unlocking Your Phone You can lock your phone manually or set the phone to lock automatically whenever you turn it off. To use a locked phone, you must enter the unlock code. A locked phone still rings or vibrates for incoming calls or messages, but you must unlock it to answer. You can make emergency calls on your phone even when it is locked. For more information, see page 30. Lock Your Phone Manually Find the Feature M > Settings > Security RY S A e c u r i t y

> Phone Lock

> Lock Now To enter your unlock code lock the phone Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) PRELIMIN Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) To enter your unlock code activate automatic lock Set Your Phone to Lock Automatically You can set your phone to lock every time you turn it off. Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock

> Automatic Lock > On 139 Unlock Your Phone At the Enter Unlock Code prompt:

Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) To enter your unlock code unlock your phone RY A Locking and Unlocking Your Keypad You can lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental keypresses (for example, when carrying your phone in a purse or pocket). Press M *

PRELIMIN when incoming calls are restricted. are restricted. Note: Incoming calls and messages unlock the keypad. Restricting Calls You can stop all incoming and/or outgoing calls, or you can restrict them to the numbers stored in your phonebook. Notes:

You can make emergency calls when outgoing calls To lock or unlock your keypad Your phone still receives incoming text messages y t i r u c e S 140 When you restrict incoming calls to numbers stored in the phonebook, a valid incoming call may be restricted if caller ID information for the call is not available from the network. Find the Feature M > Settings > Security Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (+) 3 S

> Restrict Calls RY S A To enter your unlock code open the restrict calls menu scroll to Outgoing Calls or Incoming Calls select the option change the Allow setting scroll to All, None, or Phonebook select the allowed calls e c u r i t y 7 SELECT (+) 4 CHANGE (+) 5 CHANGE (+) 6 S PRELIMIN Activating Talk Secure Your phone can attempt to send your calls using a high-security connection, to prevent others from intercepting them. For more information, see Talk Secure on page 29. Tip: The phonebook is not locked when you restrict outgoing calls to numbers stored in the phonebook. To prevent a user from adding (and then calling) a new phonebook entry, you may want to lock the phonebook. See the Lock Application item on page 56. 141 Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Talk Secure Press 1 S 2 SELECT (+) To scroll to Preferred or Off switch talk secure on or off RY A PRELIMIN y t i r u c e S 142 Troubleshooting RY T A r o u b e s h o o t i n g l Check these questions rst if you have problems with your phone. If you need additional help, contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456

(United States) or 1-800-461-4575 (Canada). Question Is your phone set up correctly?

Is your battery charged? Do you see B in the display?

Does the handset have a signal? Do you see j in the display?

Is the earpiece volume too low?

Is the other party unable to hear you?

Answer Press M #. If you do not see your phone number, contact your service provider. The battery level indicator should have at least one segment showing (C). If it does not, recharge your battery. The signal strength indicator should have at least one segment showing (1). If it does not, move to an area with a stronger signal to use your phone. While on a call, press the upper volume key on the side of your phone. Your phone may be muted. Press UNMUTE (+) if necessary to unmute the phone. Also, make sure that your phones microphone is not blocked by its carrying case or a sticker. PRELIMIN 143 Question Has the phone been damaged, dropped, or gotten wet?

Was a non-Motorola battery or battery charger used?

Answer Dropping your phone, getting it wet, or using a non-Motorola battery or battery charger can damage the phone. The phones limited warranty does not cover liquid damage or damage caused from using non-Motorola accessories. RY A The following refer to specic problems:

Problem My phone was stolen. To whom should I report this?

I forgot my password. I pressed the power key, but nothing happened. PRELIMIN Solution Report a stolen phone to the police and to your service provider

(the company that sends you your monthly wireless service bill). See If You Forget a Code or Password on page 138. Be sure to press and hold P

(the power key) until the display appears and you hear an audible alert. (This could take several seconds.) If nothing happens, check that a charged battery is installed. g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l 144 Problem The display says: Enter Unlock Code. How do I unlock my phone?

My phone asks for an unlock code when I try to open a feature. My phone does not ring. Solution Enter the factory-preset unlock code (1234), or the last four digits of your phone number. If this fails, call your service provider (the company that sends you your monthly wireless service bill). The application you want is locked. If you do not know the unlock code, see If You Forget a Code or Password on page 138. RY T A r o u b e s h o o t i n g l If you see t or y in the display, then the ringer is turned off. See Ring Styles on page 95. Also, the ringer may be set to Silent even though your phone is set to an audible ring style. See Customizing a Ring Style on page 96. The ringer may be set to play a tone even though your phone is set to a silent ring style. See Customizing a Ring Style on page 96. PRELIMIN My phone rings even though I selected the Silent (or Vibrate) ring style. 145 Problem I tried to place a call and heard an alternating high/low tone. I cannot send/

receive calls. RY A Solution Your call did not reach the wireless system. You may have dialed the number too soon after turning the phone on. Wait until you see the idle display before making a call. Make sure that you have a phone signal (see the Signal Strength Indicator item on page 24). Avoid electrical or radio interference, and obstructions such as bridges, parking garages, or tall buildings. Your phone also may have the Restrict Calls feature turned on. If you know the unlock code, you can change this setting in the security menu (M > Settings

> Security). Make sure that your antenna is not bent or damaged. Also, make sure you have a phone signal (see the Signal Strength Indicator item on page 24). Stay clear of any obstructions such as bridges, parking garages, or tall buildings. PRELIMIN My phone has poor reception and drops calls. g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l 146 Problem I cannot hear others on my phone. I cannot open my inbox. Solution While on a call, press the upper volume key. The display should show the volume increasing. Also, make sure that your phones earpiece is not blocked by its carrying case. Before you can use text or information services messages, you must set up the appropriate inbox. See Setting Up the Text Message Inbox on page 85. To see the most recent calls you dialed or received:

M > Recent Calls RY T A r o u b e s h o o t i n g l

> Received Calls or Dialed Calls How do I see the calls I sent or received?

PRELIMIN 147 Problem My phone will not send voicemail commands, passwords, or other codes. Solution Your phone sends commands and passwords as DTMF tones. You can set your phones DTMF tones to be On or Off. If you have trouble sending numbers, check your DTMF setting. 1 From the idle display, press:

RY A

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup > DTMF M > Settings My phones display is too dark. PRELIMIN 2 Press S to scroll to On. 3 Press SELECT (+) to select it. Use the Contrast feature (see page 60) to change the level of contrast in your phone display. You can also use the Backlight feature (see page 59) to change the length of time that the display backlight stays on. Your batterys performance is affected by charge time, feature use, temperature changes, backlight use, and other factors. For tips on extending your battery life, see Battery Use on page 26. My battery didnt last as long as I expected. What can I do to extend battery life?

g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l 148 Problem I am unable to record a voice note, voice name, or voice shortcut. RY T A Solution Try moving to a quieter location to make your voice recording. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice. Your phone must be set to a TTY mode for the phone to detect your TTY device. See TTY Operation on page 126. The beep indicates that you are set up correctly. If you did not hear a beep, make sure that both ends of the data cable are connected the smaller end to your phone and the larger end to your computer. Also, your computer may have deactivated the port to save power. Try opening an application that uses the port, like a fax or dial-up application, to automatically activate the port. r o u b e s h o o t i n g l My TTY device doesnt work with my phone. I plugged the data cable into my phone but my phone did not beep. How do I know if the data cable is ready to go?

PRELIMIN 149 Problem My phone beeped when I attached the data cable, but my data applications dont work. RY A Solution You must be in an area with digital coverage. Check your phones display for the digital signal indicator (F). Some wireless networks may not support data transmission. If you see the digital indicator, but you are roaming on an unfamiliar network, this may be the case. Also, remember that data transmission usually requires a subscription. Call your service provider for more information. 19200 Kbps is the data transfer rate of the connection between your computer and the phone. The rate of the connection between your phone and the network is displayed on your phone, and will be either 14400 or 9600 Kbps. Try pressing O on your phone. Or try disconnecting the cable or turning off the phone. If possible, always close the connection through your computer, as these alternative methods may disrupt the application on your computer. PRELIMIN When sending data with the data cable, why does the computer show a connection rate of 19200 Kbps?

I cant end my data call by closing the application on my computer. What can I do?

g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l 150 Problem I launched the micro-browser but the display says:

Service Not Available. Solution You may be in an area without service. If you have wireless service, look in the display for the digital signal indicator (F). If you do not see the indicator, you may be in an area that has only analog service or no service at all. If you see the digital signal indicator, you may be connected to a digital network that does not support Internet access. Try again in a few minutes. The servers may be temporarily busy. RY T A r o u b e s h o o t i n g l I launched the micro-browser but the display says:

Data Server Unavailable. PRELIMIN 151 Programming Instructions Follow this procedure if you need to program your phones phone number(s). Note: Programming is normally done by a trained technician at the site of purchase. Users should not make changes other than ones in the following procedure. Before programming, ask your service provider for your:

RY A Carrier System ID (a one- to ve-digit number) 10-digit MIN (Mobile Identication Number) Press 1 #, the Carrier System ID number, #, *, N 2 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, PRELIMIN

(This is the security code that is in the phone when it is shipped from the factory.) 3 OK (+) 4 S 5 CHANGE (+) 0 To enter programming mode enter the security code submit the security code scroll to MIN open the MIN display s n o i t c u r t s n I i g n m m a r g o r P 152 Press 6 keypad keys for the To enter the new MIN 10-digit MIN 7 OK (+) 8 DONE (-) store the new MIN exit programming mode RY P A r o g r a m m n g I i PRELIMIN n s t r u c t i o n s 153 Specic Absorption Rate Data This model phone meets the governments RY A requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the U.S. Federal Communications Commission for the United States and by Health Canada for Canada. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientic organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientic studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age or health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specic Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC and by Health Canada is 1.6 W/kg.1 Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC and by Industry Canada with the phone transmitting at its highest certied power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certied power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are PRELIMIN a t a D e t a R n o i t p r o s b A c i f i c e p S 154 i f i p e c RY S A to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public in the U.S. and Canada, it must be tested and certied to the FCC and Industry Canada that it does not exceed the limit established by each government for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) reported to the FCC and available for review by Industry Canada. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is ____ W/kg2, and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is ____ W/kg.2 (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and regulatory requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the governmental requirements for safe exposure. The FCC and Industry Canada have granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as being in compliance with the FCC and Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on le with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID ________. You may also refer to Motorolas Web site:

http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth PRELIMIN c A b s o r p t i o n R a t e D a t a 155 Additional information on Specic Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) Web site:

http://phonefacts.net or the Canadian Wireless Telecommunications Association (CWTA) Web site:

RY A http://www.cwta.ca 1. In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 2. Additional related information includes the Motorola testing protocol, assessment procedure, and measurement uncertainty range for this product. ITC01-064 PRELIMIN a t a D e t a R n o i t p r o s b A c i f i c e p S 156 The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Phones l Additional Health and Safety Information RY A A d d i t i o n a FDA has been receiving inquiries about the safety of mobile phones, including cellular phones and PCS phones. The following summarizes what is knownand what remains unknownabout whether these products can pose a hazard to health, and what can be done to minimize any potential risk. This information may be used to respond to questions. Why the concern?

Mobile phones emit low levels of radio frequency energy (i.e., radio frequency radiation) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of radio frequency energy

(RF), considered non-signicant, when in the stand-by mode. It is well known that high levels of RF can produce biological damage through heating effects (this is how your microwave oven is able to cook food). However, it is not known whether, to what extent, or through what mechanism, lower levels of RF might cause adverse health effects as well. Although some research has been done to address these questions, no clear picture of the biological effects of this type of radiation has emerged to date. Thus, the available science does not allow us to conclude that mobile phones are absolutely safe, or that they are unsafe. However, the available scientic evidence does not demonstrate any adverse health effects associated with the use of mobile phones. PRELIMIN H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 157 What kinds of phones are in question?

Questions have been raised about hand-held mobile phones, the kind that have a built-in antenna that is positioned close to the user's head during normal telephone conversation. These types of mobile phones are of concern because of the short distance between the RY A phone's antennathe primary source of the RFand the person's head. The exposure to RF from mobile phones in which the antenna is located at greater distances from the user (on the outside of a car, for example) is drastically lower than that from hand-held phones, because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with distance from the source. The safety of so-called cordless phones, which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house and which operate at far lower power levels and frequencies, has not been questioned. How much evidence is there that hand-held mobile phones might be harmful?

Briey, there is not enough evidence to know for sure, either way; however, research efforts are on-going. The existing scientic evidence is conicting and many of the studies that have been done to date have suffered from aws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of RF exposures characteristic of mobile phones have yielded conicting results. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. In one study, mice genetically altered to be predisposed to developing one type of cancer developed more than twice as many such cancers when they were exposed to RF energy compared to controls. There is much uncertainty among scientists about PRELIMIN n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 158 whether results obtained from animal studies apply to the use of mobile phones. First, it is uncertain how to apply the results obtained in rats and mice to humans. Second, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had already been treated with cancer-

causing chemicals, and other studies exposed the animals to the RF virtually continuouslyup to 22 hours per day. For the past ve years in the United States, the mobile phone industry has supported research into the safety of mobile phones. This research has resulted in two ndings in particular that merit additional study:

1 RY A A d d i t i o n a l PRELIMIN In a hospital-based, case-control study, researchers looked for an association between mobile phone use and either glioma (a type of brain cancer) or acoustic neuroma

(a benign tumor of the nerve sheath). No statistically signicant association was found between mobile phone use and acoustic neuroma. There was also no association between mobile phone use and gliomas when all types of types of gliomas were considered together. It should be noted that the average length of mobile phone exposure in this study was less than three years. When 20 types of glioma were considered separately, however, an association was found between mobile phone use and one rare type of glioma, neuroepithelliomatous tumors. It is possible with multiple comparisons of the same sample that this association occurred by chance. Moreover, the risk did not increase with how often the mobile phone was used, or the length of the calls. In fact, the risk actually decreased with cumulative hours of mobile phone use. Most cancer causing agents increase risk with increased exposure. An ongoing study of brain H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 159 cancers by the National Cancer Institute is expected to bear on the accuracy and repeatability of these results.1 2 Researchers conducted a large battery of laboratory tests to assess the effects of exposure to mobile phone RF on genetic material. These included tests for several kinds of abnormalities, including mutations, RY A chromosomal aberrations, DNA strand breaks, and structural changes in the genetic material of blood cells called lymphocytes. None of the tests showed any effect of the RF except for the micronucleus assay, which detects structural effects on the genetic material. The cells in this assay showed changes after exposure to simulated cell phone radiation, but only after 24 hours of exposure. It is possible that exposing the test cells to radiation for this long resulted in heating. Since this assay is known to be sensitive to heating, heat alone could have caused the abnormalities to occur. The data already in the literature on the response of the micronucleus assay to RF are conicting. Thus, follow-up research is necessary.2 PRELIMIN FDA is currently working with government, industry, and academic groups to ensure the proper follow-up to these industry-funded research ndings. Collaboration with the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) in particular is expected to lead to FDA providing research recommendations and scientic oversight of new CTIA-

funded research based on such recommendations. Two other studies of interest have been reported recently in the literature:

1 Two groups of 18 people were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals under laboratory conditions while n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 160 2 l d d i t i o n a RY A A they performed cognitive function tests. There were no changes in the subjects' ability to recall words, numbers, or pictures, or in their spatial memory, but they were able to make choices more quickly in one visual test when they were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals. This was the only change noted among more than 20 variables compared.3 In a study of 209 brain tumor cases and 425 matched controls, there was no increased risk of brain tumors associated with mobile phone use. When tumors did exist in certain locations, however, they were more likely to be on the side of the head where the mobile phone was used. Because this occurred in only a small number of cases, the increased likelihood was too small to be statistically signicant.4 PRELIMIN In summary, we do not have enough information at this point to assure the public that there are, or are not, any low incident health problems associated with use of mobile phones. FDA continues to work with all parties, including other federal agencies and industry, to assure that research is undertaken to provide the necessary answers to the outstanding questions about the safety of mobile phones. What is known about cases of human cancer that have been reported in users of hand-held mobile phones?

Some people who have used mobile phones have been diagnosed with brain cancer. But it is important to understand that this type of cancer also occurs among people who have not used mobile phones. In fact, brain cancer occurs in the H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 161 U.S. population at a rate of about 6 new cases per 100,000 people each year. At that rate, assuming 80 million users of mobile phones (a number increasing at a rate of about 1 million per month), about 4800 cases of brain cancer would be expected each year among those 80 million people, whether or not they used their phones. Thus it is RY A not possible to tell whether any individual's cancer arose because of the phone, or whether it would have happened anyway. A key question is whether the risk of getting a particular form of cancer is greater among people who use mobile phones than among the rest of the population. One way to answer that question is to compare the usage of mobile phones among people with brain cancer with the use of mobile phones among appropriately matched people without brain cancer. This is called a case-control study. The current case-control study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute, as well as the follow-up research to be sponsored by industry, will begin to generate this type of information. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of mobile phones?

Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-

emitting consumer products such as mobile phones before marketing, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if mobile phones are shown to emit radiation at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of mobile phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. PRELIMIN n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 162 Although the existing scientic data do not justify FDA regulatory actions at this time, FDA has urged the mobile phone industry to take a number of steps to assure public safety. The agency has recommended that the industry:

support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by mobile phones design mobile phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function cooperate in providing mobile phone users with the best RY A A d d i t i o n a l possible information on what is known about possible effects of mobile phone use on human health At the same time, FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of mobile phone safety to ensure a coordinated effort at the federal level. These agencies are:

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission Occupational Health and Safety Administration National Telecommunications and Information PRELIMIN The National Institutes of Health also participates in this group. Administration H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 163 In the absence of conclusive information about any possible risk, what can concerned individuals do?

If there is a risk from these productsand at this point we do not know that there isit is probably very small. But if people are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, RY A there are simple steps they can take to do so. For example, time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives. Those persons who spend long periods of time on their hand-

held mobile phones could consider holding lengthy conversations on conventional phones and reserving the hand-held models for shorter conversations or for situations when other types of phones are not available. People who must conduct extended conversations in their cars every day could switch to a type of mobile phone that places more distance between their bodies and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, they could switch to:

PRELIMIN carried at the waist the vehicle Again, the scientic data do not demonstrate that mobile phones are harmful. But if people are concerned about the radio frequency energy from these products, taking the simple precautions outlined above can reduce any possible risk. different antenna mounted on the outside of the car or built into a separate package a hand-held phone with a built-in antenna connected to a a mobile phone in which the antenna is located outside a headset with a remote antenna to a mobile phone n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 164 Where can I nd additional information?

For additional information, see the following Web sites:

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program (select Information on Human Exposure to RF Fields from Cellular and PCS Radio Transmitters):

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety World Health Organization (WHO) International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (select Qs

& As): http://www.who.int/emf United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board:

http://www.nrpb.org.uk Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association

(CTIA): http://www.wow-com.com U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Center for Devices and Radiological Health:

http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/consumer/

RY A A H e a l t h a n d S a f e t y d d i t i o n a l PRELIMIN 2. Tice et al. Tests of mobile phone signals for activity in genotoxicity and other laboratory assays. In: Annual Meeting of the Environmental Mutagen Society; March 29, 1999, Washington, D.C.; and personal communication, unpublished results. 3. Preece, AW, Iwi, G, Davies-Smith, A, Wesnes, K, Butler, S, Lim, E, and Varey, A. Effect of a 915-MHz simulated mobile phone signal on cognitive function in man. Int. J. Radiat. Biol., April 8, 1999. 1. Muscat et al. Epidemiological Study of Cellular Telephone Use and Malignant Brain Tumors. In: State of the Science Symposium;1999 June 20; Long Beach, California. I n f o r m a t i o n 165 4. Hardell, L, Nasman, A, Pahlson, A, Hallquist, A and Mild, KH. Use of cellular telephones and the risk for brain tumors: a case-

control study. Int. J. Oncol., 15: 113-116, 1999. ITC00-010 RY A PRELIMIN n o i t a m r o f n I y t e f a S d n a h t l a e H l a n o i t i d d A 166 Warranty a r r a n t y Limited Warranty for Motorola Personal Communications Products and Accessories Purchased in the United States and Canada I. What This Warranty Covers Defects in materials and workmanship in the following new Products manufactured, sold or certied by Motorola, with which this limited warranty is included in/on the package:

(a) wireless cellular telephones, pagers and two-way radios that operate via Personal Radio Service (such as Family Radio Service and General Mobile Radio Service), together with software imbedded in any of these products, and

(b) subject to the following exceptions, accessories or software sold for use with these products. RY W A PRELIMIN Software Exceptions. This limited warranty extends only to physical defects in the media (such as CD-ROM) that tangibly embodies each copy of any software sold and/or certied by Motorola for use with Products. Software that is not tangibly embodied in media and that is purchased separately from Products (such as software that is downloaded from the internet) comes as is and without warranty. Battery Exception. This limited warranty extends only to batteries in which the fully-charged capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity and batteries that leak;

167 RY A II. What the Period of Coverage Is Subject to the following exceptions, one year from the date the Products are purchased by the rst end-user:

90-Day Warranty Exception. The warranty is for 90 days for: (a) any software tangibly embodied in media or (b) any accessories for two-way radios that are covered by this warranty, as described in Section I, above. Limited Lifetime Warranty Exception. The warranty is a limited lifetime warranty for the lifetime of ownership by the rst end-user of the following products, only:

(a) decorative covers, including bezel, PhoneWrap or case (any model); and (b) ear buds and boom headsets that transmit mono sound through a wire connection (this does not include ear buds or boom headsets that either transmit stereo sound or that are wireless, or both). PRELIMIN Repair/Replacement Exception. The warranty is for the balance of the original warranty or for 90 days from the date returned and delivered to the rst end-user, whichever is longer. III. Who is Covered This warranty extends to you only if you are the rst end-user purchaser. IV. What We Will Do to Correct Warranty Problems At no charge to you, we have the option to repair or replace the Products that do not conform to the warranty, or to refund the Products purchase price. We may use functionally equivalent reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new Products or parts. No software updates are provided. y t n a r r a W 168 V. How to Get Warranty Service PLEASE CALL US DO NOT SHIP:

USA Cellular 1-800-331-6456 Paging 1-800-548-9954 FRS Radios 1-800-353-2729 TTY (Text Telephone) 1-888-390-6456 Canada All Products 1-800-461-4575 TTY (Text Telephone) 1-888-390-6456 RY W A a r r a n t y Accessories and softwarecall the number designated for the product with which they are used. You will receive instructions on how to ship the Products to Motorola or our designated resource. If instructed to ship the Products, you must ship them with freight, duties and insurance prepaid. Regardless of where you are instructed to return the Products, you must include: (a) a copy of your receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof of purchase;

(b) a written description of the problem; (c) the name of your service provider (if this Product requires subscription service);

(d) the name and location of the installation facility (if applicable) and, most importantly; (e) your address and telephone number. If requested, you must also return all detachable parts such as antennas, batteries and chargers. RETAIN YOUR ORIGINAL PROOF OF PURCHASE. For Products we ask you ship to us, we will ship repaired or replacement Products at our expense for the freight and insurance, but at your expense for any duties. If additional information is needed, please contact us at the telephone number listed above. PRELIMIN 169 VI. What This Warranty Does Not Cover Products that are operated in combination with ancillary or peripheral equipment or software not furnished or otherwise certied by Motorola for use with the Products (ancillary equipment), or any damage to the Products or ancillary RY A equipment as a result of such use. Among other things, ancillary equipment includes batteries, chargers, adaptors, and power supplies not manufactured or supplied by Motorola. Any of these voids the warranty. Someone other than Motorola (or its authorized service centers) tests, adjusts, installs, maintains, alters, modies or services the Products in any way. Any of these voids the warranty. Rechargeable batteries that: (a) are charged by other than the Motorola-approved battery charger specied for charging such batteries; (b) have any broken seals or show evidence of tampering; (c) are used in equipment other than the Product for which they are specied; or

(d) are charged and stored at temperatures greater than 60 degrees centigrade. Any of these voids the warranty. Products that have: (a) serial numbers or date tags that PRELIMIN have been removed, altered or obliterated; (b) board serial numbers that do not match each other, or board serial numbers that do not match the housing; or

(c) nonconforming or non-Motorola housings or parts. Any of these voids the warranty. y t n a r r a W 170 Defects or damage that result from: (a) use of the Products in a manner that is not normal or customary;

(b) improper operation or misuse; (c) accident or neglect such as dropping the Products onto hard surfaces; (d) contact with water, rain, extreme humidity or heavy perspiration; (e) contact with sand, dirt or the like; or (f) contact with extreme heat, or spills of food or liquid. RY W A a r r a n t y Physical damage to the surface of the Products, including scratches, cracks or other damage to a display screen, lens or other externally exposed parts. Failure of Products that is due primarily to any communication service or signal you may subscribe to or use with the Products. Coil cords that are stretched or that have any broken Leased Products. modular tabs. PRELIMIN Flat-rate repair rates may apply to Products not covered by this warranty. To obtain information about Products needing repairs that are not covered by this warranty, please call the telephone number previously listed. We will provide information on repair availability, rates, methods of payment, where to send the Products, etc. 171 VII. Some Other Limitations This is Motorolas complete warranty for the Products, and states your exclusive remedies. This warranty is given in lieu of all other express warranties. Implied warranties, including without limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability and tness for a RY A particular purpose, are given only if specically required by applicable law. Otherwise, they are specically excluded. No warranty is made as to coverage, availability, or grade of service provided by the Products, whether through a service provider or otherwise. No warranty is made that the software will meet your requirements or will work in combination with any hardware or applications software products provided by third parties, that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be corrected. In no event shall Motorola be liable, whether in contract or tort (including negligence) for damages in excess of the purchase price of the Product, or for any indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages of any kind, or loss of revenue or prots, loss of business, loss of information or data, or other nancial loss arising out of or in connection with the ability or inability to use the Products, to the full extent these damages may be disclaimed by law. PRELIMIN y t n a r r a W 172 a r r a n t y RY W A VIII. Patent and Software Provisions At Motorolas expense, we will defend you, and pay costs and damages that may be nally awarded against you, to the extent that a lawsuit is based on a claim that the Products directly infringe a United States patent. Our obligation is conditioned on: (a) you notifying us promptly in writing when you receive notice of the claim; (b) you giving us sole control of the defense of the suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and (c) should the Products become, or in Motorola's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, you permit us, at our option and expense, either to: procure for you the right to continue using the Products; replace or modify them so that they become non-infringing; or grant you a credit for such Products, as depreciated, and accept their return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Products, as established by Motorola. Motorola will have no liability to you with respect to any claim of patent infringement that is based upon the combination of the Products or parts furnished under this limited warranty with ancillary equipment, as dened in VI., above. This is Motorolas entire liability with respect to infringement of patents by the Products. IX. State Law and Other Jurisdiction Rights Some states and other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitation on the length of an implied warranty, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. PRELIMIN 173 This warranty gives you specic legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. To obtain information on Motorola Personal Communications Products, including warranty service, accessories and optional Extended Warranties on selected Products, please call:

RY A Canada All Products 1-800-461-4575 TTY (Text Telephone) 1-888-390-6456 USA Cellular 1-800-331-6456 Paging 1-800-548-9954 FRS Radios 1-800-353-2729 TTY (Text Telephone) 1-888-390-6456 Accessories and softwarecall the telephone number designated above for the product with which they are used. DO NOT SHIP PRODUCTS TO THESE ADDRESSES INSTEAD PLEASE CALL. To correspond with Motorola about Products, please write us at: http://www.motorola.com or at:

In the USA:

Motorola, Inc. 600 North U.S. Highway 45 Libertyville, IL 60048 PRELIMIN In Canada:

Motorola Canada Limited 5875 Whittle Road Mississauga, ON L4Z 2H4 ITC01-078 y t n a r r a W 174 Product Registration Online Product Registration:

http://www.motorola.com/warranty i Product registration is an important step toward enjoying your new Motorola product. Registering helps us facilitate warranty service, and permits us to contact you should your product require an update or other service. Registration is for U.S. residents only and is not required for warranty coverage. Please retain your original dated sales receipt for your records. For warranty service of your Motorola Personal Communications Product you will need to provide a copy of your dated sales receipt to conrm warranty status. Thank you for choosing a Motorola product. RY P A R e g s t r a t i o n r o d u c t Export Law Assurances PRELIMIN This product is controlled under the export regulations of the United States of America and Canada. The Governments of the United States of America and Canada may restrict the exportation or re-exportation of this product to certain destinations. For further information contact the U.S. Department of Commerce or the Canadian Department of Foreign Affairs and International Trade. 175 Index A accessories optional 10, 80, 109, 126, 128, 131 standard 18 accessory connector port 1 x e d n I Attach Number feature 32, 64 auto PIN dial 58 automatic redial RY A turning on/off 58 using 2829 B backlight 59 battery 103 le 114115 reminders, turning on/off Add Digits feature 64 alert selecting 96 setting sound le as ring creating 97102 dened 95 downloading a sound PRELIMIN animation 59 antenna 1 application, locking 56 appointments. See dened 24 illustration 23 analog signal indicator storing a sound le tone 90 8990 car kit charger time 130 charging 1920 extending battery life 2627, 59, 148 installing 1819 level indicator 20, 23, 24 meter 55 battery save 59 blackjack 120121 block cursor, dened 40 browse text mode 41 browser alerts 52 browser. See micro-browser datebook 176 C calculator 116118 calendar. See datebook call adding digits after phone number 64 call (continued) prex digits, inserting 32 36, 6364 privacy 29, 141 received calls list 34, receiving 22 recent calls 6364 restricting 140141 ring style, setting 95 secure connection 29, RY I A 141 sending 21 speakerphone, n d e x 6364 alert, creating 97102 alert, selecting 96 answer options 56 answering 22 call waiting 35 calling card 33 canceling 30 data call 133136 datebook, opening 36 deleting 6364 dialed calls list 34, 36, PRELIMIN emergency number 30 ending 22 ignoring 30 in-call timer 5556 incoming call type, dialing 21 dialing a recent call message center, setting 135136 accessing 36 6364 muting 36 placing 21 activating 36 storing 6364 terminating 30 three-way call 35 timing 6566 unanswered call 29 voice dial 34 Call Failed message 28 call timers described 6566 resetting 66 viewing 66 call waiting 35 caller ID 29, 30 calling card call 33 calling line identication. See caller ID 177 car kit automatic answer 128 automatic hands-free 129 charger time 130 power-off delay 129 clock dened 24 illustration 23 codes x e d n I 131133 computer connecting to phone changing 137138 default 21, 137 if you forget a contrast, display 60 currency converter 118 cursor 40 customer service, calling code/password 138 PRELIMIN connecting to external device 131133 customizing the menu 125 incoming call format, D data call display 51 setting 135136 receiving 134136 178 data call (continued) sending 133134 date, setting 58 datebook adding an event 77 alarm 77 calendar 75 changing event RY A information 77 copying an event 78 day view 76 deleting an event 79 event reminders, turning on/off 103 event view 76 reminders 77 week view 75 Datebook Menu 75, 76 deleting a call 6364 dialed calls list 34, 36, 6364 dialing a number 21 Dialing Menu 32, 65 digital signal indicator dened 24 illustration 23 animation 59 backlight 59 contrast 60 described 2325 greeting 58 display (continued) idle display 23 illustration 23 language 59 zoom setting 25, 59 drafts folder 53 DTMF tones 36, 60, 64, 148 E earpiece F factory settings, resetting 6061 51, 8082 falling numbers 122 ashing cursor, dened 40 FM Stereo Radio Headset RY I A G games 119124 greeting, display 58 n d e x H hands-free mode illustration 1 volume, adjusting 25 email address, storing in phonebook 6870 email, sending 7172, emergency number 30 end key functions 1, 22 menu functions 37 ending a call 22 Enter Unlock Code 9193 PRELIMIN message 138, 140 headset 118 Entry Method menu 46 event alert 96 exchange rate, calculating connecting to phone external device 131133 automatic answer 128 automatic call routing 129 charger time 130 dened 128 power-off delay 129 speakerphone, activating 36 automatic answer 128 FM Stereo Radio Headset 51, 8082 headset jack 1 high-security connection 29, 141 179 I idle display, dened 23 ignoring a call 30 in use indicator dened 24 illustration 23 inbox, text message 8586 in-call timer 5556 incoming call x e d n I indicators (continued) silent ring style 25, 95 soft ring style 25, 95 vibrate ring style 25, 95 voice message waiting voice name 67 23, 24, 84 RY A end 1, 22, 37 left soft key 1, 23, 37, iTAP software 4649 K key 125 lock 56, 140 menu 1, 10, 23, 24, 37 power 1, 20 right soft key 1, 23, 37, 125 scroll 1, 37 send 1, 21, 22 voice 1, 71, 107 volume control 1, 25 answering calls 56 locking and unlocking 56, 140 volume, setting 97 L language, setting 59 Last Calls Menu 64 24 29 indicators battery level 20, 23, 24 digital/analog signal 23, canceling 30 ignoring 30 terminating 30 type, setting 135136 Incoming Call message PRELIMIN in use 23, 24 loud ring style 25, 95 menu 23, 24 message waiting 23, style 25, 95 ring style 23, 25, 95 roam 23, 24 signal strength 23, 24 silent alert 25 missed call 30 ring and vibrate ring 24, 87 keypad 180 left soft key customizing 125 functions 1, 23, 37 Line Not Secure message 29 lock applications 56 keypad 56, 140 phone 139140 voice notes 111 menu (continued) lists 38 locking applications 56 My Tones Menu 101, 102 navigating 10, 37 Phonebook Menu 67 Quick Note Menu 9394 rearranging features RY I A scroll feature 59 Text Msg Menu 8889 using features 10, 3840 n d e x Voice Notes Menu 108, 125 87 25, 95 lock application feature 56 loud ring style indicator Low Battery message 24 M making a call 21 master clear 61 master reset 60 Memory is Full! message PRELIMIN Browser Menu 114 customizing 125 Datebook Menu 75, 76 Dialing Menu 32, 65 entering text 3940, Entry Method menu 46 features 5062 language, setting 59 Last Calls Menu 64 4149 menu 109, 110 menu indicator dened 23, 24 illustration 23 menu key 1, 10, 23, 24, 37 message browser alert 52 deleting, text 8789 dialing number from 32 drafts folder 53 inbox setup, text message 8586 locking, text 8789 outbox 52, 94 quick note 9394 reading, text 8789 receiving, text 8687 181 message (continued) reminders, receiving 84, 87 reminders, turning on/off 103 sending 32, 9193 sound, storing 8990 status 94 text 8594 voicemail 8384 message waiting indicator micro-browser 114115 using 113114 dened 24 displayed 87 illustration 23 browser alerts 52 sound, downloading PRELIMIN microphone 1 missed call indicator 30 Missed Call message 30 missed call, dialing 34 muting a call 36 my telephone number 22, my tones 97102 My Tones Menu 101, 102 36, 54 number, viewing your own N network settings 61 notepad 22, 54 numeric text mode 41 dened 64 entering digits 64 retrieving digits 64 RY A O one-touch dial dened 31 using 31 voicemail number 31 optional accessory, dened 10 optional feature, dened 10 outbox 52, 94 P passwords. See codes pause character 33 phone answer options 56 codes 137138 connecting to external device 131133 erase user-entered information 61 x e d n I 182 phone (continued) feature specications phone number (continued) viewing your own 22, 36, 55 information 36 keypad, locking and unlocking 56, 140 locking 139140 muting a call 36 reset all options 60 secure connection 29, 36, 54 voice dial 34 phonebook 64 attaching two numbers RY I A capacity, checking 73 deleting an entry 72 dialing a number 7172 editing an entry 72 email address 67 entry name 67 elds 67 number type indicator n d e x 138 141 active phone line, unlocking 21, 139140 voice dial 34 phone number security code 137 specications 36, 55 turning on/off 20 unlock code 21, 137, PRELIMIN redialing 28 sending text message to adding digits after 64 attaching to prex digits attaching two numbers changing 54 storing in phonebook 32 64 32 67 one-touch dial 31 phone number 67 prex digits, inserting 32 ringer ID, activating/deactiv ating 9697 ringer ID, dened 69, 96 ringer ID, setting 69 sending an email 7172 sorting entries 73 speed dial number 67, 69 speed dial number, dened 31 6870 speed dial, using 31 183 phonebook (continued) reminders (continued) storing an entry 6870 voice name entry 7071 voice name indicator 67 Phonebook Menu 67 PIN code, dialing automatically 58 power key 1, 20 predictive text entry 4649 privacy, call 29, 141 x e d n I voicemail message 84 restricting calls 140141 right soft key ring and vibrate ring style ring alert customizing 125 functions 1, 23, 37 creating ??102 selecting 96 RY A customizing 9697 dened 95 indicators 25, 95 setting 95 indicator 25, 95 ring style ring style indicator dened 25, 95 illustration 23 ring tone, setting sound le as 90 volume, adjusting 25 volume, setting 97 ringer ID activating/deactivating 9697 dened 69, 96 listed in phonebook setting for phonebook entry 67 entry 69 dened 85 quick note 9394 Q quick dial R radio 8082 received calls list 34, 36, changing number(s) 58 using 51 PRELIMIN automatic redial 2829 busy number 28 receiving a call 22 recent calls 6364 redial reminders 6364 ringer datebook 77 dened 103 text message 87 turning on/off 103 184 roam indicator dened 24 illustration 23 S scroll feature 59 scroll keys 1, 37 secure connection 29, 141 security code changing 137138 sound downloading 114115 setting as ring tone 90 storing a sound le 36 speed dial speakerphone, activating 8990 RY I A changing number 69 number, dened 31 sorting phonebook entries by 73 using 31 n d e x standby time, increasing shortcuts signal strength indicator send key 1, 21, 22 sending a call 21 short message service. See text message dened 24 illustration 23 creating 104105 standard 104 using 106 PRELIMIN 25, 95 text customizing 125 functions 23, 37 illustration 1 silent alert indicator 25 silent ring style indicator SMS. See text message soft keys soft ring style indicator 25, 95 27 storing a call 6364 symbol text mode 4546 symbols, entering 4546 T Talk Secure feature 29, tap method text entry 141 4244 telephone number, viewing your own 22, 54 block cursor 40 browse mode 41 character chart 44 entering from keypad 4149 185 text (continued) entry mode, changing 41 ashing cursor 40 iTAP software predictive text entry 4649 numeric mode 41 symbol chart 45 symbol mode 4546 tap method 4244 text message dened 85 deleting 8789 dialing number from 32 drafts folder 53 inbox setup 8586 locking 8789 outbox 52 quick note 9394 reading 8789 receiving 8687 reminders 87 sending 32, 9193 sound, storing 8990 status 94 PRELIMIN text mode, changing 41 Text Msg Menu 8889 three-way call 35 time, setting 58 timers travel charger, using 20 TTY device 126127 described 6566 resetting 66 viewing 66 RY A keypad 56, 140 phone 139140 U unlock unlock code 138 bypassing 138 changing 137138 entering 21, 139, 140 V vibrate alert selecting 96 vibrate ring style indicator 25, 95 setting 95 video poker 122124 voice dial dialing a number 34, 72 recording voice name 7071 sending an email 72 x e d n I 186 W wait character 33 warranty 167174 Web pages 113114 RY I A Z zoom setting 25, 59 n d e x voice key volume keys 1, 25 dialing a number 34 functions 1 recording a voice name 71 recording a voice note 107 voice message waiting indicator 23, 24, 84 voice name voicemail voice notes 107112 Voice Notes Menu 108 voice shortcut dened 70 phonebook indicator 67 recording 7071 creating 104105 dened 104 using 106 PRELIMIN number, storing 83 receiving 84 reminders, turning on/off listening to message(s) dialing with one-touch dial 31 volume 103 84 earpiece 25 keypad 97 ringer 25, 97 U.S. patent Re. 34,976 187 RY A PRELIMIN x e d n I 188 Wireless Phone Safety Tips RY A Safety is your most important call!

Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies the benets of wireless phones, one that every user When driving a car, driving is your rst responsibility. If you nd it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the must uphold. PRELIMIN following tips:

1 Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road. 189 2 When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motorola Original hands-free accessories available today. RY A 3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. 4 Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy trafc or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy trafc can be hazardous. 5 If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibilitydriving safely. PRELIMIN 6 Dial sensibly and assess the trafc; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into trafc. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 190 8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of re, trafc accident or medical emergencies.*

9 Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you.*

10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken trafc signal, a minor trafc accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.*

RY A PRELIMIN

* Wherever wireless phone service is available. 191 Check the laws and regulations on the use of wireless telephones and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. RY A PRELIMIN For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE or visit the CTIA Web site at www.wow-com.com ITC00-011 192 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Welcome Welcome to the world of Motorola digital wireless communications! We are pleased that you have chosen the Motorola V70 wireless phone. Earpiece Headset Jack Insert headset accessory for hands-free use. Volume Key Adjust earpiece and ringer volume. Left Soft Key Perform functions identied by left display prompt. Menu Key Power/End Key Press & hold to power phone on & off. Press & release to end phone calls,exit menu system. Microphone Display Right Soft Key Perform functions identied by right display prompt. Send Key Send and answer calls, view recent dialed calls list. Navigation Keys Scroll through menus and lists, set feature values. Accessory Connector Port Insert charger and phone accessories. 1 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM

(United States)

(Canada) Personal Communications Sector 600 North U.S. Highway 45 Libertyville, Illinois 60048 1-800-331-6456 (United States) 1-888-390-6456 (TTY/TDD United States) 1-800-461-4575 (Canada) www.motorola.com www.motorola.ca MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. TrueSync, Sidekick, Starsh and the Stylized Starsh Logo are registered trademarks of Starsh Software, Inc., a wholly owned independent subsidiary of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. 2001 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Software Copyright Notice The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be modied, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Manual number:

Cover number:

2 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Map Main Menu Recent Calls Received Calls Dialed Calls Notepad Call Times Call Cost Service Dial Fixed Dial Phonebook Datebook Quick Dial Messages Voicemail Text Msgs Browser Alerts Info Services Quick Notes Outbox Drafts Shortcuts Voice Dial SIM Applications Browser Calculator Games Settings

(see next page) Note: This is the standard phone menu layout. You or your service provider may have changed the menu layout or changed some feature names. Not all features may be available for all users. Shortcuts Change display zoom:

Press M, then press and hold M Display my phone number:

Press M #

Go to dialed calls list:

Press N Exit menu system:

Press O 3 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Other Settings Personalize Main Menu Keys Greeting Quick Dial Initial Setup Time and Date 1-Touch Dial Backlight Zoom Scroll Animation Language Battery Save Contrast DTMF Master Reset Master Clear Network Car Settings Headset Settings Menu Ring/Vibrate Alert Alert Detail My Tones Call Forward Voice Calls Fax Calls Data Calls Cancel All Forward Status Phone Status My Tel. Numbers Credit Info/Available Active Line Battery Meter Other Information Browser Setup In-Call Setup In-Call Timer Call Cost Setup My Caller ID Talk and Fax Answer Options Call Waiting Security Phone Lock Lock Application Fixed Dial Call Barring SIM Pin New Passwords 4 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Contents About Your Phone Menu Map About This Guide Safety and General Information Getting Started

. 3

. 10

. 12

. 19 Whats in the Box? . 19 Installing the SIM Card and Battery . 19 Charging the Battery . 22 Turning Your Phone On . 23 Sending a Call . 25 Ending a Call . 25 Receiving a Call . 26 Displaying Your Phone Number . 26

. 27 Display . 27 Changing the Zoom Setting . 30 Adjusting Volume . 31 Battery Use . 33

. 35 Redialing a Number . 35 Using Automatic Redial . 35 Caller ID . 36 Line Security . 37 Returning an Unanswered Call . 37 Dialing an Emergency Number . 38 Entering Numbers in the Notepad . 38 Terminating an Incoming Call . 39 Dialing With Speed Dial . 39 Dialing With 1-Touch Dial . 40 Sending and Receiving Calls 5 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Contents Entering Text Using the Menu Using Features While On a Call Dialing a Number in a Text Message . 40 Additional Dialing Features . 41

. 44 Using Call Waiting . 44 Making a Conference Call . 45 Transferring a Call . 46 Additional On-Call Features . 48

. 49 Navigating to a Feature . 49 Selecting a Feature . 50 Entering Feature Information . 51

. 53 Choosing a Text Mode . 53 Tap Method . 54 Symbol Mode . 57 Predictive Text Entry with iTAP Software . 58

. 63

. 79 Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List . 79 Using the Notepad . 82 Viewing and Resetting Call Timers . 83 Viewing and Resetting Call Costs . 85

. 87 Fields in a Phonebook Entry Form . 87 Storing a Phonebook Entry . 88 Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry . 91 Dialing a Phonebook Entry . 92 Editing a Phonebook Entry . 94 Deleting a Phonebook Entry . 95 Menu Feature Descriptions Recent Calls Phonebook 6 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Contents Radio Datebook Copying Phonebook Entries Between the Phone and SIM Card 95 Checking Phonebook Capacity . 99 Synchronizing with TrueSync Software . 99 Setting Up the Phonebook . 100

. 102 Week View . 102 Day View . 103 Event View . 103 Storing a New Event . 104 Changing Event Information . 105 Copying an Event . 106 Deleting an Event . 107

. 108 Turning the Radio On and Off . 108 Tuning a Station . 108 Storing a Preset . 109 Selecting a Preset . 109 Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On . 109

. 111 Storing Your Voicemail Number . 111 Receiving a New Voicemail Message . 111 Listening to a Voicemail Message . 112

. 113 Setting Up the Text Message Inbox . 113 Receiving a Text Message . 115 Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message . 115 Sending a Text Message . 117 Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages . 119 MessagesVoicemail MessagesText 7 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Contents Shortcuts Micro-Browser Calculator Games

. 120 Standard Shortcuts . 120 User-Settable Shortcuts . 120 Creating a Shortcut . 121 Using Shortcuts . 122

. 123 Starting a Micro-Browser Session . 123 Interacting With Web Pages . 124

. 125 Calculating Numbers . 125 Converting Currency . 127

. 128 Selecting and Starting a New Game . 128 Ending a Game . 129 Playing a Game . 129

. 133 Ring/Vibrate . 133 Reminders . 140 Call Forwarding . 141 Reordering Menu Items . 143 Customizing a Soft Key Function . 144 Hands-Free Use . 144

. 148 Connecting Your Phone to an External Device . 149 Sending a Data or Fax Call . 150 Receiving a Data or Fax Call . 151 Sending a Talk then Fax Call . 152

. 153 Assigning a New Code or Password . 153 Adjusting Your Settings Data and Fax Calls Security 8 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Contents If You Forget a Code or Password . 155 Locking and Unlocking Your Phone . 155 Barring Calls . 157 Protecting the SIM Card . 158

. 160

. 169

. 169

. 170

. 172

. 185 Troubleshooting Product Registration Export Law Assurances Specic Absorption Rate Data Index Wireless Phone Safety Tips 9 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About This Guide Using Your Phones Features This user guide introduces you to the many features in your Motorola V70 phone. A reference guide for your phone is also available that explains the phones features in more detail. To obtain a copy of the reference guide or another copy of this user guide, see the Motorola Web site at:

(United States) http://motorola.com/consumer/manuals http://www.motorola.ca/manuals or contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456 in the United States or 1-800-461-4575 in Canada.

(Canada) Navigating To a Menu Feature You can access many of your phones features through the menu system. This guide shows you how to navigate to a specic menu feature as follows:

Find the Feature M

Dialed Calls Recent Calls The > symbol means that you should scroll to and select the feature. This example shows that you must press M and select to view the dialed calls list.

, then scroll to and select

, scroll to Dialed Calls Recent Calls 10 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About This Guide Optional Features Features marked with this label are optional network, SIM card, and/or subscription-dependent features. These features may not be offered by all service providers in all geographical areas. Contact your service provider for information about availability. Optional Accessories Features marked with this label require the use of an optional Motorola Original accessory. 11

User.Guide.GSM.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR PHONE. RF Operational Characteristics Your phone contains a transmitter and a receiver. When it is ON, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) energy. The phone operates in the frequency range of xx through xx. When you communicate with your phone, the system handling your call controls the power levels at which your phone transmits. The output power level typically may vary over a range from xx watts to xx watts in analog mode and xx watts to xx watts in digital mode. Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy Your Motorola phone is designed to comply with the following national and international standards and guidelines regarding exposure of human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic energy (EME):

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition 12 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Safety and General Information National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) of the United States, Report 86, 1986 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation-Human Exposure) Standard 1999 To assure optimal phone performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:

Portable Phone Operation and EME Exposure Antenna Care Unauthorized antennas, modications, or Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. attachments could damage the phone and may violate FCC regulations. Do NOT hold the antenna when the phone is in use. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed. 13 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Safety and General Information Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your phone as you would a wireline telephone. microphone. Speak directly into the Body-Worn Operation To maintain compliance with FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a phone on your body when transmitting, always place the phone in a Motorola-supplied or approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may exceed FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, and are not holding the phone in the normal use position at the ear, ensure the phone and its antenna are at least one inch

(2.5 centimeters) from your body when transmitting. Data Operation When using any data feature of the phone, with or without an accessory cable, position the phone and its antenna at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body. Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories, visit our website at www.motorola.com. 14 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Safety and General Information Electromagnetic Interference/

Compatibility Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise congured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conicts, turn off your phone in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your phone when on board an aircraft. Any use of a phone must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by, and recommendations of, the United States Food and Drug Administration. 15 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Safety and General Information Persons with pacemakers should:

ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches

(15 centimeters) from your pacemaker when the phone is turned ON. NOT carry the phone in the breast pocket. use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. turn OFF the phone immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Safety and General Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your phone while driving, please:

16 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Safety and General Information give full attention to driving and to the road. use hands-free operation, if available. pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Operational Warnings For Vehicles With an Air Bag Do not place a portable phone in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inate with great force. If a portable phone is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inates, the phone may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your phone prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless the phone is a model specically identied as being Intrinsically Safe. Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or re resulting in bodily injury or even death. Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. 17 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Safety and General Information Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn OFF your phone when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Operational Cautions Antennas Do not use any portable phone that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. ITC01-076 18 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 19 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Whats in the Box?

Your digital wireless phone typically comes equipped with a battery and a charger. Other accessory options can customize your phone for maximum performance and portability. To purchase Motorola Original accessories, please contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456 in the United States or 1-800-461-4575 in Canada. Installing the SIM Card and Battery Before you can use your phone, you need to install and charge the battery. Your phone is designed to be used only with Motorola Original batteries and accessories. We recommend that you store batteries in their protective cases when not in use. Your SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card contains your phone number, service details, and phonebook/message memory. It must be installed in the base of the phone. Caution: Do not bend or scratch your SIM card. Avoid exposing your SIM card to static electricity, water, or dirt. 19 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 20 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Step 1 Remove the back cover of the phone:

a While pressing the release button at the bottom of the cover, slide the cover downward. b Pull the cover away from the base. 20 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 21 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Step 2 Insert the SIM card, with the notch at the upper right and the gold plate downward, into the SIM slot

(located above the battery compartment). When the SIM card is properly positioned, the battery compartment terminals are visible. Install the battery by inserting the tabs at the base of the battery into the slots at the bottom of the battery compartment. Push the battery down and snap it into place. 3 4 5 Re-install the back cover by aligning the cover about 1/2 inch down on base and tting the cover onto the base. b a 21 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 22 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Step 6 Push down on the cover while sliding it upward into position. Charging the Battery New batteries are shipped partially charged. Before you can use your phone, you need to install and charge the battery, as indicated by the following instructions. Some batteries perform best after several full charge/discharge cycles. Step 1 Plug the travel charger into the phone with the release tabs facing up. 2 Plug the other end of the travel charger into the appropriate electrical outlet. 3 When your phone indicates that the battery is fully charged (Charge Complete), press the release tab and remove the travel charger. 22 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 23 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Note: When you charge the battery, the battery level indicator in the upper right corner of the display shows how much of the charging process is complete. See the Battery Level Indicator item on page 29. Turning Your Phone On Step 1 Open your phone Result expose the keypad 2 Press and hold O

(the End/Power key) turn on your phone End/

Power Key 23 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 24 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Step 3 If necessary, enter your SIM card PIN code and press OK (J) 4 If necessary, enter your four-digit unlock code and press OK (J) Result unlock your SIM card Caution: If you enter an incorrect PIN code three times in a row, your SIM card is disabled and your phone displays the message SIM Blocked. (For more information, see Protecting the SIM Card on page 158.) unlock your phone The unlock code is originally set to 1234. (For more information, see Locking and Unlocking Your Phone on page 155.) 24 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 25 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Sending a Call To call a number, your phone:

must be rotated completely open to expose the keypad must be turned on must have a SIM card inserted and unlocked must have a network connection with adequate signal strength Press 1 keypad keys 2 N (send key) To dial the phone number (up to 32 digits) Tip: If you make a mistake, press DELETE (L) to delete the last digit, or press and hold DELETE (L) to clear all digits. send the call Note: You can make an emergency call even when the phone is locked, or when a SIM card is not inserted. See Dialing an Emergency Number on page 38. Ending a Call Press O (end key) To end the call 25 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 26 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Getting Started Receiving a Call To receive a call, your phone:

must be rotated completely open to expose the keypad or have a headset (an optional accessory) plugged in must be turned on must have a SIM card inserted and unlocked must have a network connection with adequate signal strength If your phone is locked, you must unlock it to answer the call. Note: Your phone cannot receive calls when your SIM card is locked. When you receive a call, your phone rings and/or vibrates and displays an incoming call message. Press N or ANSWER (J) To answer the call Displaying Your Phone Number From the idle display:

Press M #

To see your phone number Note: Your phone number must be programmed on your SIM card in order to use this feature. 26 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 27 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone See page 1 for a diagram of your phone that describes basic phone components. Display The top section of the display shows phone status indicators. The following illustration shows some of the common indicators that you may see at the top of the display when using your phone. Messages, phone numbers, and menu options appear in the middle of the display. Text labels at the bottom corners of the display show the current soft key functions. A M (menu) indicator in the bottom center of the display indicates that you can open the main menu or a feature sub-menu to see more options. For more information about the soft key and menu key labels, see Using the Menu on page 49. Some of the phone functions described in this guide must be performed from the idle display. The term idle display refers to the standard display that you see when your phone is on and ready to use, when you are not on a call or using the menu system. 27 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 28 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone In Use Indicator Roam Indicator Message Waiting Indicator Signal Strength Indicator Alert Setting Indicator Clock 5 O , = & E P w 12:00 am GPRS e Voice Message Waiting Indicator Battery Level Indicator Active line indicator Menu Indicator GPRS Indicators Signal Strength Indicator Shows the strength of your phones connection with the network. Strong 5 4 3 2 1 j No signal You cannot send or receive calls when the no signal indicator is displayed. In Use Indicator Appears when a call is in progress. Roam Indicator Appears when your phone uses another network system outside your home network. When you leave your home network area, your phone roams or seeks another network. 28 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 29 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone Message Waiting Indicator Appears when your phone receives a text message. Voice Message Waiting Indicator Appears when you receive a voicemail message. Battery Level Indicator Shows the amount of charge left in your battery. The more segments visible, the greater the charge. High E D C B Empty Recharge your battery as soon as possible when you see the Low Battery warning message. Note: When you charge the battery, the battery level indicator instead shows how much of the charging process is complete. See Charging the Battery on page 22. Active Line Indicator When you use a SIM card that supports dual phone lines, this indicator shows the current active phone line. See the Active Lineoption on page 69. GPRS Indicators Indicate that a GPRS packet data connection is active. This type of connection may be used by your service provider to allow faster data transfer speeds. The GPRS indicators do not mean that you are in a call; they simply indicates that you are registered on the network via a GPRS connection. 29 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 30 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone Menu Indicator Indicates that you can press M to open a menu. See Using the Menu on page 49. Clock Shows the current time. Alert Setting Indicator Shows the current selected alert prole. The default alert setting is a ringer. w Loud ring y Vibrate t Silent x Soft ring u Ring and vibrate Changing the Zoom Setting You can set your phones display to show either three lines or two lines of text plus soft key labels. Three lines of text display more information, while two lines increase text size. Note: By default, your phone uses two lines to display Chinese characters. When your phone is set to display Chinese characters, the zoom setting is not available. To change the display view, press M once, then press and hold M again within two seconds of the rst press. You can also adjust the zoom setting from the menu. See the Zoom item on page 75. 30 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 31 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone Adjusting Volume You can adjust your phones earpiece and ringer volume:

When you are in a call the idle display is showing You Can Adjust earpiece speaker volume ringer volume You can increase or decrease volume in two ways:

use only the volume key use the volume key in combination with the up/down navigation key Volume Key Up/Down Navigation Key To change keypad volume, see Customize an Alert Prole on page 134. 31 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 32 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone Using Only the Volume Key The volume key works in only one direction. To Increase Volume Press the volume key repeatedly. Each press of the volume key raises the volume one level. If you press and hold the volume key, the volume cycles to the highest level and then stops. To Decrease Volume Press and hold the volume key until the volume cycles to and stops at the highest level. Release the volume key, then press again. The volume begins at the lowest level and adjusts upward as you continue to press the key. Using the Volume Key and the Up/Down Navigation Key Step 1 Press the volume key once Press the up-arrow (on the up/down navigation key) Result Your phone displays the volume meter. Volume increases. or Press the down-arrow

(on the up/down navigation key) Volume decreases. 2 32 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 33 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone Battery Use Caution: To prevent injuries or burns, do not allow metal objects to contact or short-circuit the battery terminals. To maximize your batterys performance:

Always use Motorola Original batteries and battery chargers. The phone warranty does not cover damage caused from using non-Motorola batteries and/or battery chargers. New batteries or batteries that have been stored for long periods of time may require a longer charge time. Maintain the battery at or near room temperature when charging. Do not expose batteries to temperatures below -10C

(14F) or above 45C (113F). Always take your phone with you when you leave your vehicle. When you do not intend to use a battery for a while, store it uncharged in a cool, dark, dry place, such as a refrigerator. Over extended periods of time, batteries gradually wear down and require longer charging times. This is normal. If you charge your battery regularly and notice a decrease in talk time or an increase in charging time, then it is probably time to purchase a new battery. The more you talk on the phone or use phone features (like sending text messages), the less standby time your battery has. 33 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 34 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM About Your Phone The rechargeable batteries that power this product must be disposed of properly and may need to be recycled. Refer to your batterys label for battery type. Contact your local recycling center for proper disposal methods. Never dispose of batteries in a re because they may explode. 34 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 35 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls This chapter describes features related to sending and receiving calls. For information about other call-related features, see Recent Calls on page 79 and Data and Fax Calls on page 148. For basic instructions on how to send, end, and receive a call, see pages 2526 of the Getting Started section. Note: To send and receive calls, rotate your phones cover open. Redialing a Number You can redial a previously dialed phone number, whether the call was connected or busy. From the idle display:

Press 1 N 2 K 3 N To go directly to the dialed calls list scroll to the entry you want to call redial the highlighted number Using Automatic Redial You must turn on automatic redial to use this feature. See the Auto Redial item on page 75 to turn on automatic redial. If you receive a busy signal, your phone displays Call Failed. 35 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 36 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls When automatic redial is turned on, your phone automatically makes a number of redial attempts until the call goes through. When the call goes through, your phone rings or vibrates one time, displays the message Redial Successful, and then connects the call. When automatic redial is turned off, you can manually activate the feature to redial a phone number. When you hear a busy signal and see the Call Failed message:

Press N or RETRY (J) To activate automatic redial Caller ID The calling line identification (caller ID) feature lets you see who is calling before you answer. If the callers name is stored in your phonebook, the phone automatically displays the name. Otherwise, the phone displays the callers phone number. If caller ID information is not available, your phone displays the message Incoming Call. 36 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 37 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls Line Security If your phone displays Line Not Secure while you are on a call, your phone has detected another device monitoring the call. This message does not appear when caller ID, call cost, or other information lls the display. Returning an Unanswered Call Your phone keeps a record of your unanswered calls. When you cannot answer a call, your phone displays:

the T (missed call) indicator the message X Missed Calls, where X is the total number of missed calls Press 1 VIEW (J) 2 K 3 N To see the received calls list, beginning with the most recent call scroll through the list and select a call that you want to return send the call 37 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 38 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls Dialing an Emergency Number Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers (such as 112 or 911) that you can call under any circumstances. You can dial and call the emergency number even when your phone is locked, when you are prompted to enter a code or password, when the SIM card is not inserted in your phone, or when the SIM card is blocked or disabled. Note: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your phones emergency number(s) may not work in all locations. To call the emergency number at any time:

Press 1 keypad keys 2 N To dial the emergency number (such as 112) call the emergency number Entering Numbers in the Notepad Your phone stores the most recent string of digits entered on the keypad in a temporary memory location called the notepad. These digits can be the last phone number that you called, or a phone number that you simply entered but did not call. These digits remain in the notepad even when you turn off the phone. You can use the notepad to store a phone number that you intend to call later (such as a phone number told to you by the other party during a call). To retrieve these digits, see Using the Notepad on page 82. 38 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 39 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls Terminating an Incoming Call While the phone is ringing or vibrating:

Press O or IGNORE (L) To cancel the incoming call Depending on your phone settings and the type of subscription you have, the call may be forwarded to another number, or the caller may hear a busy signal. Dialing With Speed Dial Speed dial lets you dial any phonebook entry with a minimal number of keypresses. When you store an entry in your phonebook, it is assigned a unique speed dial number. You can then use the speed dial feature to call the entry. Press 1 keypad keys 2 #

3 N To enter the one-, two-, or three-digit speed dial number for the entry you want to dial submit the number call the entry To make an entry in the phonebook or view an existing entrys speed dial number, see Storing a Phonebook Entry on page 88. 39 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 40 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls Dialing With 1-Touch Dial You can call phonebook entries 1 through 9 with the push of a single key. Press and hold the one-digit speed dial number for one second. To store entries in locations 1 through 9 in the phonebook, see Storing a Phonebook Entry on page 88. Note: You must specify which phone number list you want to use with this feature: phone memory phonebook, or SIM card phonebook. See 1-Touch Dial Preference on page 101. Dialing a Number in a Text Message If you receive a text message with an embedded phone number, you can dial the number directly. Note: You must set up the text message inbox before you can receive text messages. See Setting Up the Text Message Inbox on page 113. Find the Feature M> Messages > Text Msgs Press 1 K 2 M 3 K 4 SELECT (J) To scroll to the message with the number open the Text Msg Menu scroll to Call Back dial the number in the message If the message contains more than one phone number, press K to scroll to a number, then press SELECT (L) to dial. 40 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 41 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls Additional Dialing Features In addition to pressing numbers on your keypad, you can insert numbers or characters and send calls in a variety of ways. To dial the local international access code:

Do This Press 0 for two seconds To insert the international access code for the country from which you are dialing While dialing (with digits visible in the display):

Do This Press M

> Attach Number Press M

> Hide ID/Show ID Press M

> Send Message Press M

> Talk Then Fax To attach a number from the phonebook or recent calls list to the end of the digits you entered Hide (or show) your caller ID for the next call create a text message addressed to the number entered talk and then send a fax to the same phone number within the same call 41 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 42 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls Do This Press M and then scroll to and select one of the following:

Insert Pause

(to insert a p) Insert Wait

(to insert a w) Insert 'n'

(to insert an n) To insert a special character when making a call that requires you to dial and send additional digits (for example, to make a calling card call, or to retrieve messages from an answering machine):

Pause tells your phone to wait until the call connects before it automatically sends the next digit(s) in a series. Wait tells your phone to wait until the call connects, and then to prompt you for conrmation before it sends the next digit(s).

'n' tells your phone to prompt you for a number before dialing the call. The number you enter is inserted into the dialing sequence in place of the n character. 42 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 43 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Sending and Receiving Calls You can also call numbers using these features:

Do This Press V. Dial (L), and say the entrys name within two seconds Press M > Service Dial

> entry to call Press M > Fixed Dial

> entry to call Press M > Recent Calls

> Received Calls or Dialed Calls

> entry to call To Call a phone number using the voice dial feature See Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry on page 91. a service dial number programmed on the SIM card a xed dial number a missed call or a number from a call you recently dialed or received 43 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 44 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using Features While On a Call Using Call Waiting If you subscribe to call waiting, an alert tone sounds while you are on a call to indicate that you have received a second call. To put the rst call on hold and answer the second call:

Press 1 N 2 SWITCH (J) To answer the new call switch back to the rst call Note: You can press SWITCH (J) at any time to switch between calls. or LINK (L) connect the two calls To end the rst call and answer the second call:

Press 1 O 2 N To end the current call Your phone rings to signal the new call. answer the new call You must activate call waiting in order to use the feature. See the Call Waiting item on page 72 to activate call waiting. 44 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 45 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using Features While On a Call Making a Conference Call To talk to more than one person on a call, you can make a conference call. Call the rst person, call the second person, then link the two calls. keypad keys Press 1 2 N 3 HOLD (J)

(if available) or M > Hold keypad keys 4 5 N LINK (L) 6 7 O To dial the rst persons number call the number put the rst call on hold Your phone displays a l (ashing phone) indicator next to the call on hold. dial the next persons number call the number Your phone displays a W (active call) indicator next to the new active call. connect the two calls end the entire call 45 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 46 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using Features While On a Call Transferring a Call While you are on a call, you can transfer the call to another phone by rst talking to the person who answers the other phone, or by directly transferring the call. Announce the Call Transfer You can talk to the person who answers the other phone before you transfer the call, to tell them whom you are transferring. Find the Feature M > Hold Press 1 keypad keys 2 N 3 M 4 K 5 6 SELECT (J) OK (J) To enter the phone number where you are transferring the call dial the phone number Speak to the person who answers the target phone. open the menu scroll to Transfer select Transfer conrm the transfer Your phone displays the message Transfer: Complete when the call is transferred. You can hang up the phone when you see this message. 46 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 47 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using Features While On a Call Do Not Announce the Call Transfer You can directly transfer a call without talking to the person who answers. Find the Feature M > Transfer Press 1 keypad keys 2 N To enter the phone number where you are transferring the call dial the phone number Your phone displays the message Transfer: Complete when the call is transferred. You can hang up the phone when you see this message. 47 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 48 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using Features While On a Call Additional On-Call Features While you are on a call, you can perform the following tasks:

Do This Press HOLD (J) (if available) or Press M > Hold Press M >

My Tel. Numbers Press M > Send Tones To put a call on hold Your phone displays a l

(ashing phone) indicator to indicate that the call is on hold. see your phone number send a number to the network as DTMF tones, for credit card calling or password entry To activate DTMF tones, see the DTMF item on page 76 48 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 49 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using the Menu Navigating to a Feature You can access many of your phones features by using these keys to move through the menu system:

Volume Key Adjust earpiece and ringer volume. Left Soft Key Perform functions identied by left display prompt. Menu Key Power/End Key Press & hold to power phone on & off. Press & release to end phone calls,exit menu system. Right Soft Key Perform functions identied by right display prompt. Send Key Send and answer calls, view recent dialed calls list. Navigation Keys Scroll through menus and lists, set feature values. 49 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 50 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using the Menu This guide shows how to navigate to a menu feature as follows:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls

> Dialed Calls The > symbol means that you should scroll to and select the feature. This example shows that you should press M, scroll to and select Recent Calls, then scroll to and select Dialed Calls to see the dialed calls list. Selecting a Feature Some features require you to select an item from a list:

Press BACK (L) to return to the previous screen. A sub-menu is available. Press M to open the sub-menu. Dialed Calls 10) John Smith 9) Mary Smith BACK M VIEW Highlighted item Press VIEW (J) to view details of the highlighted item. STORE (J) appears if you can store the item in your phonebook. Select an item by highlighting it using one of these approaches:

Press K to scroll up or down to the item you want. In a numbered list, press a number key to highlight the item. In an alphabetized list, press a key multiple times to cycle through the letters on the key and highlight the closest matching list item. 50 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 51 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using the Menu Entering Feature Information Features such as the phonebook and datebook require you to enter information to ll in an entrys details:

Press K to scroll down to additional items. Highlighted item Entry Details Name: John Smith No.: 2125551212 CANCEL M CHANGE Press CANCEL (L) to exit without making changes. DONE (L) appears when you enter or edit information. Press DONE (L) to save your changes. Press CHANGE (J) to edit the selected information. Enter numbers or text with the keypad. (See Entering Text on page 53.) When an item has a list of possible values, press * to scroll left or # to scroll right, and select a value. When an item has a list of possible numeric values, press a number key to set the value. If you enter or edit information and then decide that you do not want to save your changes, press O to exit without saving. 51 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 52 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Using the Menu The message center lets you compose and send text messages.

(See Entering Text on page 53.) A flashing cursor shows you where the text will appear:

Flashing cursor indicates insertion point. Press CANCEL (L) to exit without making changes. Msg:

______________ ______________ CANCEL M BROWSE Press BROWSE (J) to view and insert a name, number, or message from previously stored information. Press M to open the sub-menu. When you enter text, the ashing cursor changes to a block cursor, and the soft key functions change:

Block cursor indicates current highlighted character. After two seconds, the block cursor reverts to a ashing cursor and moves to the next position. Press DELETE (L) to delete the character to the left of the insertion point. Msg:

T_____________ ______________ Press OK (J) to accept and store the text. DELETE M OK 52 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 53 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text Various text entry methods make it easy for you to enter names, numbers, and text messages on your phone. You can enter all characters (letters, numbers, and symbols) using the standard tap method. Other text modes let you easily enter numbers and symbols, or insert text already stored on your phone. Finally, a predictive text mode lets you enter text messages with a minimum of keypresses. Choosing a Text Mode To activate a text mode, press M and select the text mode from the from any text entry screen Entry Method menu:

iTAP Tap Method Numeric Symbol Browse Let the phone predict each word as you enter it, then choose the word from a list (see Predictive Text Entry with iTAP Software on page 58). Enter characters one at a time by pressing the key for the letter, number, or symbol (see Tap Method on page 54). This is the standard mode for entering text on your phone. Enter only the number that appears on each key. Enter symbols only (see Symbol Mode on page 57). Browse through your phonebook and recent calls lists to select a name or number to enter. The text mode you select remains active until you change Note:

it by selecting another mode. 53 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 54 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text Tap Method Tap method is the default standard mode for entering text on your phone. To activate tap method from any text entry screen, press M and select the To enter text using the tap method:

menu option. Tap Method Do This 1 Press a number key one or more times 2 3 Continue to press number keys

(J Press

) OK To cycle through the characters associated with the key and select the character you want (see the Character Chart on page 56). enter the rest of the characters in the text message accept and store the text when you are nished 54 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 55 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text General Text Entry Rules Use the keypad to enter letters, numbers, symbols, and other characters with the tap method. Press the same key repeatedly to cycle through available characters. (See the Character Chart on page 56.) Press a number key to enter text at ashing cursor location. Press a number key as many times as necessary to enter the desired character. Press and hold a number key to cycle between tap method and numeric text entry mode. Msg:

__________ CANCEL M BROWSE Press up or down navigation keys to change character in block cursor to uppercase or lowercase. Press left or right navigation keys to move ashing cursor to the left or right in text message. If you do not press a key for two seconds, the character in the block cursor is accepted, and the cursor moves to the next position. 55 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 56 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text The rst character of each sentence is capitalized unless you down to force the character to manually change it. (Press K lowercase while it is highlighted by the block cursor.) Character Chart Use this chart as a guide for entering spaces, numbers, letters, symbols, and other characters with the tap method. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 space . 1 ? ! , @ _ & ~ : ; " - ( ) '

A B C 2 a b c 2 D E F 3 d e f 3 G H I 4 g h i 4 J K L 5 j k l 5 M N O 6 m n o 6 P Q R S 7 p q r s 7 T U V 8 t u v 8 W X Y Z 9 w x y z 9

+ - 0 x * / \ [ ] = > < #

Your phone model may not include all of the characters Note:

shown in the above chart. 56 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 57 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text Symbol Mode Your phone provides an alternate way to nd and enter symbol characters in a text message. You can view and select from a variety of available symbols. To activate symbol mode from any text entry screen, press M and select the To enter a symbol in symbol mode:

Symbol menu option. Do This 1 Press a number key one time 2 3 Press the scroll left * or the scroll right # key or Press the number key multiple times Press SELECT (J) To display its symbol options (see the Symbol Chart on page 58) The symbols associated with the key you pressed are shown at the bottom of the display. If necessary, press other keypad keys to nd the symbol you want. highlight the symbol you want add the highlighted symbol to the text area at the top of the display 57 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 58 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text Symbol Chart Use this chart as a guide for entering symbols in symbol mode. 1 space . ? ! , @ _ & : ; " - ( ) '

2 @ _ \

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

+ - x * / =

Predictive Text Entry with iTAP Software iTAP software provides a predictive text entry method that lets you enter the letters of a word using only one keypress per letter. You must activate iTAP software prior to entering letters. You can do this from any text entry screen by pressing M to open the Entry Method menu and selecting the iTAP menu option. 58 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 59 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text Enter Words To enter a word with iTAP software:

Do This 1 Press a number key one time 2 Press number keys

(one per letter) 3 When you have entered all the letters of the word, press K Press SELECT (J) 4 To enter the rst letter of the word The letters associated with the key you pressed are shown at the bottom of the display. enter the rest of the word Alternative words and letter combinations are shown at the bottom of the display based on the keys you press. These word choices are updated with each keypress. locate and highlight the word you want add the highlighted word to the text area at the top of the display A space is automatically inserted after the word. 59 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 60 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text For example, to spell the word act, press 2 2 8. The display shows:

Flashing cursor indicates insertion point.

______________ ______________ Cat Act Bat Abu

DELETE M SELECT Press DELETE (L) to clear the last letter entered. Enter Novel Words Press * and #

scroll and see additional word choices. Press SELECT (J) to insert the highlighted word at the insertion point. You may enter a word that is not in the iTAP software dictionary. If you enter all the letters of a word but the word is not displayed:

Do This 1 Press DELETE (L) one or more times 2 Press the scroll left * or the scroll right # key To delete one or more letters until you see a letter combination that matches the start of the word highlight the letter or letter combination 60 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 61 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text

(J SELECT Do This 3 Press

), then press the scroll left *

Continue entering letters and highlighting letter combinations key 4 To shift the text entry cursor to the left and lock the selected portion of the word spell the word Punctuation The iTAP software automatically adds a space after each word. When you enter punctuation, this space is removed. To enter punctuation with iTAP software:

Press 1 or 0 To enter punctuation or other characters as shown in the Character Chart on page 56 Capitalization The rst word of a sentence is automatically capitalized, with following words in lowercase. To set or adjust character capitalization with iTAP software:

Press K up or down To change the words to initial character capitalized, all uppercase characters, or all lowercase characters 61 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 62 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Entering Text Enter Numbers To enter a number with iTAP software:

Do This 1 Enter the rst digit and then highlight it Press number keys

(J Press

) SELECT 2 3 To put the iTAP software in number entry mode add digits to the number enter the number at the insertion point Delete Letters and Words Place the cursor to the right of the text that you want to delete, and then:

DELETE Do This

(L Press

) Continue to hold DELETE

(L

) To delete one letter at a time delete the entire message 62 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 63 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions This chapter describes all of your phones features in order of the menu map shown on pages 34. Some descriptions also include page numbers where you can nd more detailed information. If you would like to learn more about a specic feature, a reference guide for your phone is also available. To obtain a copy of the reference guide or another copy of this user guide, see the Motorola Web site at:

http://motorola.com/consumer/manuals http://www.motorola.ca/manuals or contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456 (United States) or 1-800-461-4575 (Canada).

(United States)

(Canada) Main Menu ALLS C R ECENT Received Calls

M Recent Calls

Received Calls View a list of recently received calls. See Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List on page 79. Dialed Calls Recent Calls

M

Dialed Calls View a list of recently dialed calls. See Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List on page 79. 63 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 64 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Notepad M > Recent Calls

> Notepad Call or store the last number entered on the keypad. See Entering Numbers in the Notepad on page 38, and Using the Notepad on page 82. Call Times M > Recent Calls

> Call Times View call timers that track time spent on your last call, dialed calls, received calls, all calls since reset, and all calls total. See Viewing and Resetting Call Timers on page 83. Call Cost M > Recent Calls

> Call Cost View call cost information. Your network may provide current credit information, and can provide cost information about the amount spent on your last call, dialed calls, received calls, and all calls total. See Viewing and Resetting Call Costs on page 85. SERVICE DIAL M > Service Dial Dial pre-programmed numbers stored on your SIM card. Your service provider can program your SIM card with phone numbers for services such as taxi companies, restaurants, and hospitals. FIXED DIAL M > Fixed Dial Dial or edit numbers in the xed dial list. When you activate the xed dial feature, users can only call the numbers in the xed dial list. To activate xed dial, see the Fixed Dial item on page 73. 64 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 65 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Fixed dial list entries can be any length. If there is a xed dial entry for the digits 555, users can call any number that starts with 555. You must enter your SIM PIN2 code to edit xed dial entries. In the xed dial list, you can create, edit, delete, and sort entries just like in the phonebook list. Fixed dial list entries are stored on your SIM card and do not have Type or Voice Name elds. Note: Employers can use xed dial to limit employees phones to a predened list of numbers, country codes, or other prexes. PHONEBOOK M > Phonebook Store names and numbers as entries in your phonebook, then call numbers by selecting them from the phonebook list. See Phonebook on page 87. DATEBOOK M > Datebook Use the datebook calendar to schedule and review your appointments. See Datebook on page 102. QUICK DIAL M > Quick Dial Dial pre-programmed numbers stored on your phone. Your service provider may program your phone with one or more quick dial numbers, such as the customer service number. You can call them by selecting them from the quick dial list. Note: Your service provider may use a different name for this feature. 65 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 66 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions MESSAGES M > Messages Adjust message settings, view and manage the various types of messages your phone can receive and/or send:

Voicemail Listen to your recorded voice messages. See Messages Voicemail on page 111 Send and receive text messages. See MessagesText on page 113 Text Msgs Browser Alerts Read alert messages received by your Info Services Quick Notes Outbox Drafts micro-browser Read information services messages

(subscription-based broadcast messages, such as stock updates, news, and weather reports) that you have received Select and send pre-written messages from the quick notes list. View all outgoing text messages, delivered and undelivered Store and edit text messages that you have written but not sent SHORTCUTS M > Shortcuts Create keypad shortcuts to menu features. See Shortcuts on page 120. 66 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 67 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions VOICE DIAL M > Voice Dial Dial a phonebook entry by saying the pre-recorded voice name for that phonebook entry. See Voice Dial Using the Menu on page 93. SIM APPLICATIONS M > SIM Applications Access information and applications stored on your SIM card. Your SIM card may contain applications that process your outgoing calls, text messages, and other events. Contact your service provider for details. BROWSER M > Browser Access Web pages and run Web-based applications. The micro-browser delivers WAP

(Wireless Application Protocol) pages from your service provider directly to your phone. See Micro-Browser on page 123. CALCULATOR M > Calculator Use your phone as a calculator or currency converter. See Calculator on page 125. GAMES M > Games Play games on your phone. See Games on page 128. 67 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 68 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Settings Menu RING/VIBRATE Alert M > Settings

> Ring/Vibrate

> Alert Select a ring or vibration alert prole for incoming calls and messages. See Ring/Vibrate on page 133. Alert Detail M > Settings

> Ring/Vibrate

> Alert Detail Change details about the current alert prole. Alert represents the name of the alert prole. See Ring/Vibrate on page 133. My Tones M > Settings

> Ring/Vibrate

> My Tones Create custom alert tones for your phone. See Use the My Tones Feature on page 135. CALL FORWARD M > Settings

> Call Forward Set options for forwarding incoming voice, data, and/or fax calls to another phone number. See Call Forwarding on page 141. 68 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 69 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions PHONE STATUS My Tel. Numbers M > Settings

> Phone Status

> My Tel. Numbers View, enter, and edit information about your name and phone number. Credit Info M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Credit Info View the credit available, its expiration date, and the date of the last deposit. (This feature is available only if you subscribe to a prepay option.) Credit Available M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Credit Available View the credit available. (This feature is available only if you subscribe to the advice-of-charge feature.) Active Line M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Active Line Change the active phone line to send and receive calls from either of the available numbers. (This feature is available only for dual-line enabled SIM cards.) Battery Meter M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Battery Meter View a detailed battery charge meter. 69 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 70 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Other Information M > Settings

> Phone Status

> Other Information View your phones feature specications (if available from the service provider). BROWSER SETUP M > Settings

> Browser Setup Adjust the micro-browsers network connection settings, or create a new network connection prole. IN-CALL SETUP Set the features that are active during a call, such as the in-call timer, call waiting, and call answering options. In-Call Timer M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> In-Call Timer Adjust call timer display and beep settings. You can set your timer to beep at a selected interval during your calls. (60 seconds is the default.) You can also turn on or off a display timer during calls as follows:

Time Display the elapsed time for the current call Display the cost of the current call (if you subscribe to a call cost option or advice-of-charge) Cost 70 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 71 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Total Cost Display the cost of all calls since the last time you reset the timer (if you subscribe to a call cost option or advice-of-charge) Credit Available Display how much credit you have left (if you subscribe to a call cost option or advice-of-charge) No in-call timer display Off Call Cost Setup M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> Call Cost Setup Adjust call cost settings. You can assign a credit limit so that your phone displays your remaining credit during calls. Your phone noties you when you approach your limit, and ends the call when you reach it. Your phone network expresses cost in the amount of units used, but this feature lets you tell your phone how to translate the units to a currency. My Caller ID M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> My Caller ID Activate and deactivate the display of your phone number as an ID when you call someone. 71 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 72 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Talk and Fax M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> Talk and Fax Activate and deactivate the talk/fax service. Use this feature prior to making a call when you want to talk and then send or receive a faxall to the same phone number and within the same call. You can also use the talk then fax feature to send a fax during a call. See Sending a Talk then Fax Call on page 152. Answer Options M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> Answer Options Turn call answering options on or off:

Multi-Key Answer by pressing any key Open to Answer Answer by opening the ip Call Waiting M > Settings

> In-Call Setup

> Call Waiting Activate and deactivate call waiting. When call waiting is activated and another call arrives while you are on a call, call waiting can play a tone to notify you of the new call. See Using Call Waiting on page 44. 72 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 73 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions SECURITY Phone Lock M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock Lock and unlock your phone. See Locking and Unlocking Your Phone on page 155. Lock Application M > Settings > Security

> Lock Application Lock and unlock specic phone applications (such as phonebook or datebook). When an application is locked, users must enter the unlock code to use the application. Fixed Dial M > Settings

> Security

> Fixed Dial Restrict outgoing calls to numbers on the xed dial list. See Fixed Dial on page 64. Call Barring M > Settings > Security

> Call Barring Restrict incoming and outgoing calls. See Barring Calls on page 157. SIM PIN M > Settings > Security

> SIM PIN Switch SIM card protection on and off, so users must enter the SIM card PIN code when they turn on the phone or insert a SIM card. See Protecting the SIM Card on page 158. 73 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 74 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions New Passwords M > Settings > Security

> New Passwords Change your unlock code (originally set to 1234) or your security code (originally set to 000000). See Assigning a New Code or Password on page 153. OTHER SETTINGS Personalize M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Personalize Set several personal phone options:

Main Menu Change the order of the main menu.

(See Reordering Menu Items on page 143.) Change the functions of the soft keys in the idle display. (See Customizing a Soft Key Function on page 144.) Change the text displayed when you turn on your phone Keys Greeting Quick Dial Change quick dial number(s) Initial Setup M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup Set many basic phone options:

Time and Date Set the phones time and date 74 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 75 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions 1-Touch Dial Auto Redial Backlight Zoom Assign the 1-touch dial feature to numbers 1 through 9 in your phone memory phonebook or SIM card phonebook. (See 1-Touch Dial Preference on page 101.) Use this option to turn on or turn off the automatic redial feature. When you turn on automatic redial, your phone automatically redials calls that fail due to busy conditions. (See Using Automatic Redial on page 35.) Set the amount of time that the display backlight remains on, or turn off the backlight to conserve battery power Switch between three lines (Zoom Out) and two lines (Zoom In) of display text Note: By default, your phone uses two lines to display Chinese characters. When your phone is set to display Chinese characters, the zoom setting is not available. 75 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 76 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Scroll Animation Language Battery Save Contrast DTMF Master Reset Force the cursor to stop or wrap around when it reaches the top or bottom of a list in the display Turn animation off (to conserve the battery) or on. Animation makes your phones menus move smoothly as you scroll up and down. Set the language for phone menus Adjust the phones power usage characteristics to conserve power Adjust the contrast setting for your display Your phone can send a number to the network as dual tone multi-frequency

(DTMF) tones. DTMF tones are used to communicate with automated systems that require you to enter a number such as a code, password, or credit card number. Use this option to set DTMF tones to be long, short, or off. Reset all options back to their original factory settings except for the unlock code, security code, and lifetime timer 76 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 77 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Master Clear Reset all options back to their original factory settings except for the unlock code, security code, and lifetime timer, and clear all user settings and entries Note: This option erases all user-entered information stored in your phones memory, including phonebook and datebook entries. Once you erase the information, it cannot be recovered. Network M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Network View and adjust your phones network settings. Your service provider registers your phone to a network. You can view information about the current network, change how your phone searches for a network, specify your preferred networks, and activate alerts that indicate when a call is dropped or network registration changes. Car Settings M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Car Settings Adjust hands-free car kit settings. You can set your phone to route calls directly to the Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit when it detects a connection, and automatically answer calls after two rings. See Hands-Free Use on page 144. 77

User.Guide.GSM.book Page 78 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Menu Feature Descriptions Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the laws and regulations on the use of these products. Headset M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Headset Set your phone to automatically answer calls after two rings when connected to a headset. See Hands-Free Use on page 144. 78

User.Guide.GSM.book Page 79 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls You can use the recent calls menu to view received calls or dialed calls, retrieve the last number stored in the notepad, and view or reset call times and costs. Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List Your phone keeps lists of the numbers from calls you recently received and dialed, even if the calls did not connect. The lists are sorted from newest to oldest entries. The oldest entries are deleted as new ones are added. Each entry tells you the persons number (or name, if available) and whether the call connected or not. You can call, store, or delete the numbers on these lists. Shortcut: Press N to go directly to the dialed calls list from the idle display. To open the recent calls menu:

Find the Feature M> Recent Calls Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) 3 K To scroll to Received Calls or Dialed Calls select Received Calls or Dialed Calls scroll to an entry you want to call, store, or delete Note: < means the call connected. 79 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 80 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls Press 4 N or J or M To call the entrys number Tip: Press and hold N for two seconds to send the entry number as DTMF tones. To activate DTMF tones, see the DTMF item on page 76. if View appears above the J key view the entrys details if Store appears above the J keystore the entrys details in the phonebook open the Last Calls Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list The Last Calls Menu includes the following options:

Option Store Delete 80 Description Create a phonebook entry with the selected number in the No. eld. (This option does not appear if STORE appears above the J key, or if the number is already stored as a phonebook entry.) Delete the entry. (This option does not appear if DELETE appears above the J key.) User.Guide.GSM.book Page 81 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls Option Delete All Hide ID/Show ID Send Message Add Digits Description Delete all entries in the current list. Hide (or show) your caller ID for the next call. Create a new text message, with the selected number in the Tel No. eld. See Sending a Text Message on page 117. Add digits to the end of the selected number. Attach Number Attach another number from the Send Tones Talk then Fax phonebook or recent calls list to the end of the selected number. Send the selected number to the network as DTMF tones, for credit card calling or password entry. (This option is available only during an active call.) To activate DTMF tones, see the DTMF item on page 76. Tell the network you want to call and talk to someone, and then send a faxall to the same number in the same call. See Sending a Talk then Fax Call on page 152. 81 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 82 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls Using the Notepad Your phone uses a notepad to store the most recent string of digits enteredeither for a phone number that you called or for a number that you entered but did not call. To call the number, create a phonebook entry, or perform other operations with the number stored in the notepad:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls > Notepad To call the number open the Dialing Menu (to attach a number or insert a special character) See Additional Dialing Features on page 41. create a new phonebook entry, with the notepad number copied into the No. eld. See Storing a Phonebook Entry on page 88. Press N or M or STORE (J) 82 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 83 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls Viewing and Resetting Call Timers Your phone tracks and records call times. Use the recent calls menu to view and reset a call timer. Network connection time is the elapsed time from the moment you connect to your service providers network to the moment you end the call by pressing O. This time includes busy signals and ringing. The amount of network connection time you track on your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time for which you are billed by your service provider. For billing information, please contact your service provider directly. You can view the approximate network connection time elapsed during the following calls:

Timer Last Call Dialed Calls Received Calls All Calls Lifetime Description Time spent on the last call dialed or received. You cannot reset this timer. Total time spent on dialed calls since the last time you reset this timer. Total time spent on calls received since the last time you reset this timer. Total time spent on dialed and received calls since the last time you reset this timer. Total time spent on all calls on this phone. You cannot reset this timer. 83 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 84 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls To view a call timer:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls

> Call Times Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to the timer you want to view view the recorded time To reset the call timer:

Press 1 2 RESET (J) YES (L) To reset the time (if available) conrm the reset 84 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 85 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls Viewing and Resetting Call Costs Your phone network can provide the following cost information:

Cost Tracker Credit Available Description Amount of your credit remaining. For GSM advice-of-charge, this is only available if you set a credit limit. Note: Your phone receives cost information from the advice-of-charge feature or third-party prepay software. Expiration Date Date that the available credit expires Last Deposit Last Call Dialed Calls

(available only with a subscription to a prepay option). Amount of the last deposit (available only with a subscription to a prepay option). Amount spent on the last call you dialed or received. You cannot reset this cost tracker. Amount spent on calls you dialed since the last time you reset this cost tracker. Received Calls Amount spent on calls you received since the last time you reset this cost tracker. 85 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 86 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Recent Calls Cost Tracker All Calls Description Amount spent on all dialed and received calls since the last time you reset this cost tracker. You can reset this value separate from Dialed Calls and Received Calls, so Dialed Calls plus Received Calls may not equal All Calls. To view a cost tracker:

Find the Feature M > Recent Calls

> Call Cost Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To reset the cost tracker:

Press 1 2 RESET (J) OK (L) To scroll to the cost tracker you want to view view the recorded cost To reset the cost (if available) enter your PIN2 code to conrm the reset 86 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 87 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook You can store a list of names and phone numbers in your phones electronic phonebook. You can view these entries and call them directly from your phone. To see the list of names stored in your phonebook, press M > Phonebook from the idle display. Scroll to a name and press VIEW (J) to view details of the phonebook entry as shown in the following display. Fields in a Phonebook Entry Form Voice Name indicator indicates a recorded voice name Entrys Name Type indicator identies number type:

$ Work U Home S Main h Mobile Z Fax p Pager Return to list

$*Carlo Emrys 2154337215 Speed No. 15 BACK M EDIT Entrys phone number Entrys speed dial number Edit entry Press M to open the Phonebook Menu Note: Phonebook entries stored on the SIM card do not have Type or Voice Name information. 87 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 88 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Storing a Phonebook Entry A phone number is required for a phonebook entry. All other information is optional. You can store a phonebook entry on your phone or on the SIM card. Entries with a speed dial number from 1 to 500 are stored on the phone. To store a phonebook entry on your SIM card, assign a speed dial number of 501 or higher to the entry when you create it. The total number of entries you can store on the SIM card is dependent on your service provider. Shortcut: Enter a phone number in the idle display, then press STORE (J) to create a phonebook entry with the number in the No. eld. Go directly to step 1 in the following procedure to enter additional information and store the entry. Note: You can also use the following procedure to store a xed dial entry by scrolling to and selecting Fixed Dial. Enter Information Find the Feature M > Phonebook M > New Press 1 2 CHANGE (J) keypad keys 3 4 OK (J) CHANGE (J) To select Name enter a name for the phonebook entry (see Entering Text on page 53) store the name select No. 88 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 89 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Press 5 6 7 keypad keys OK (J) CHANGE (J) 8 K 9 10 SELECT (J) RECORD (J) or Go to step 11 if you do not want to record a voice name for the entry 11 K 12 CHANGE (J) To enter the phone number store the phone number select Type Note: This option is not available for entries stored on a SIM card. scroll to the type of phone number select the number type record a Voice Name for the entry, if desired See Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry on page 91. Note: This option is not available for entries stored on a SIM card. scroll to Speed No., the number to speed dial the entry The next available speed dial number is assigned to a new phonebook number by default. select Speed No. if you want to change it 89 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 90 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Press 13 keypad keys 14 OK (J) 15 SELECT (J) To enter a different speed number, if desired Note: Entries with a speed dial number from 1 to 500 are stored on the phone. Entries with a speed dial number of 501 or higher are stored on the SIM card. save the modied speed number If your chosen speed number is already assigned to another entry, you are asked if you want to replace that entry. select MORE if you want to create another entry with the same Name Note: You must enter a name and number to use this option. Complete Phonebook Entry When you are nished entering information for a phonebook entry:

Press DONE (L) To store the entry and return to the phonebook list 90 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 91 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry You can record a voice name when you create a new phonebook entry, or when you edit a previously stored phonebook entry. This lets you use voice dial to call the number without dialing (see Voice Dial Using a Soft Key on page 93). Note: You cannot record a voice name for an entry stored on a SIM card. Tip: Make your voice recording in a quiet location. Hold the phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and speak directly into the phones microphone in a normal tone of voice. Find the Feature M > Phonebook Do This 1 Press K 2 3 4 5 Press VIEW (J) Press EDIT (J) Press K Press RECORD (J) To scroll to the entry that needs a voice name display the entrys detailed view edit the phonebook entry scroll to Voice Name begin the recording process The phone displays Press RECORD Key then say name. 91 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 92 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Do This 6 Press and release RECORD (J) and say the entrys name (in two seconds) 7 Press the voice key and repeat the name To record the voice name The phone displays Press RECORD Key then REPEAT name. conrm the voice name The phone displays Trained:

Voice Name. Dialing a Phonebook Entry You can use the phonebook list, voice dial, speed dial, or 1-touch dial to call a number stored in your phonebook. To use speed dial, see Dialing With Speed Dial on page 39. To use 1-touch dial, see Dialing With 1-Touch Dial on page 40. Phonebook List To call a number in the phonebook list:

Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 K 2 N To scroll to the entry you want to call send the call 92 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 93 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Voice Dial Using a Soft Key To call a number using voice dial via a soft key:

Do This Press and release L and speak the entrys pre-recorded name

(within two seconds). Result Your phone goes to the entry in the phonebook list, repeats the voice name, pauses two seconds, then automatically dials the call. To pre-record a phonebook entry name, see Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry on page 91. Voice Dial Using the Menu To call a number using voice dial via the menu:

Find the Feature M > Voice Dial Do This 1 Press SELECT (J) 2 Say the pre-recorded phonebook entry name To activate the voice dial mechanism the phone displays Say Name Now to select the entry to be dialed 93 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 94 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Editing a Phonebook Entry You can edit a phonebook entry stored on your phone or the SIM card. Notes:

If you change an entrys speed dial number, the entry is moved to the new speed dial location and the original entry is deleted. Entries with a speed dial number from 1 to 500 are stored on the phone. Entries with a speed dial number of 501 or higher are stored on the SIM card. You can also use the following procedure to edit a xed dial entry by scrolling to and selecting Fixed Dial. Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 K 2 3 VIEW (J) EDIT (J) To scroll to the entry you want to edit display the entrys detailed view edit the phonebook entry Edit a phonebook entry or xed dial entry by following the procedures described in Storing a Phonebook Entry on page 88. 94 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 95 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Deleting a Phonebook Entry To delete a phonebook entry:

Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 K 2 M K 3 4 SELECT (J) 5 YES (L) To scroll to the entry you want to delete open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Delete select Delete conrm the deletion Copying Phonebook Entries Between the Phone and SIM Card You can copy one or more phonebook entries from your phone to the SIM card or from the SIM card to your phone. Notes:

This procedure copies the original entry to a new location. It does not delete the original entry. The SIM card cannot store Type and Voice Name data for entries. If you try to copy an entry with a type or voice name to the SIM card, the phone asks you for conrmation before dropping this information and copying the entry. 95 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 96 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Copy a Single Entry To copy a single phonebook entry from your phone to the SIM card or from the SIM card to your phone:

Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 K 2 M 3 K 4 SELECT (J) 5 6 keypad keys OK (J) To scroll to the entry you want to copy Note: Entries with a speed dial number from 1 to 500 are stored on the phone. Entries with a speed dial number of 501 or higher are stored on the SIM card. open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Copy Entry select Copy Entry The phone displays the Copy To form, with the next available speed dial number. edit the speed dial number on the Copy To form approve the copy to the speed dial number The phone displays the Stored message. You can now delete the old phonebook entry, if desired. 96 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 97 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Copy Multiple Entries To copy multiple phonebook entries from your phone to the SIM card or from the SIM card to your phone:

Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 M 2 K 3 SELECT (J) 4 K 5 6 CHANGE (J) keypad keys 7 OK (J) 8 K 9 CHANGE (J) To open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Copy Entries select Copy Entries The phone displays the Copy Entries form. scroll to From (start) select From (start) enter the rst (lowest) speed dial number in the range of entries that you want to copy Note: Entries with a speed dial number from 1 to 500 are stored on the phone. Entries with a speed dial number of 501 or higher are stored on the SIM card. store the number and return to the Copy Entries form scroll to From (end) select From (end) 97 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 98 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Press 10 keypad keys 11 OK (J) 12 K 13 14 CHANGE (J) keypad keys 15 16 OK (J) DONE (L) To enter the last (highest) speed dial number in the range of entries that you want to copy store the number and return to the Copy Entries menu scroll to To (start) select To (start) enter the rst (lowest) new speed dial number for the entries new location store the number and return to the Copy Entries menu copy the entries The phone displays the Copied Entries message. You can now delete the old entries, if desired. 98 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 99 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Checking Phonebook Capacity You can check phonebook capacity to see how much space is left for storing phonebook entries on your phone and on the SIM card. For entries stored on the phone, your phone displays a memory meter that shows how much memory space remains to store phonebook and datebook entries. For the SIM card, your phone lists the number of phonebook entries used and the number available. Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 M 2 K 3 SELECT (J) To open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Phone Capacity select Phone Capacity Your phone displays the phone memory meter, or the number of SIM card phonebook entries available. Synchronizing with TrueSync Software You can synchronize phonebook entries between your phone and computer or hand-held device with Starsh TrueSync software, a Motorola accessory product. See the TrueSync user guide for more information. Note: TrueSync software is designed to synchronize with basic features of many popular Personal Information Management

(PIM) software and hardware products. 99

User.Guide.GSM.book Page 100 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook Setting Up the Phonebook You can specify the sort order for your phonebook entries and the location of your 1-touch dial entries. Phonebook List Sort Preference You can set up your phone to sort your phonebook list by speed dial number (the standard), name, or voice dial. Tip: The voice dial sort is identical to the name sort, except that the entries with voice name tags appear rst. Find the Feature M > Phonebook Press 1 M 2 K 3 4 K 5 6 K 7 SELECT (J) CHANGE (J) SELECT (J) To open the Phonebook Menu scroll to Setup select Setup scroll to Sort by select Sort by scroll to the entry you want select the entry you want 100 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 101 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Phonebook 1-Touch Dial Preference Your phone lets you specify whether your 1-touch dial entries are located on the phone or the SIM card:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Other Settings

> Initial Setup Press 1 K 2 3 K 4 CHANGE (J) SELECT (J) To scroll to 1-Touch Dial select 1-Touch Dial scroll to the list you want select the list you want 101 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 102 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Datebook The datebook is a calendar that lets you schedule and organize events such as appointments and meetings. You can review your schedule of events for the week or by the day, and have the datebook play a reminder alarm for specic events. Note: You must set the correct time and date in order to use the datebook. Use the Time and Date feature (see page 74) to set the time and date. To schedule or review events in the datebook:

Find the Feature M > Datebook Week View When you open the datebook, your phone displays a calendar for the week. Lines or lled boxes under each day indicate scheduled events. Untimed event 12 hour window Exit the datebook

{ 15 NOV-21 NOV S M T W T F S EXIT M VIEW Days of week

(press * (left) or

# (right) to select) One-hour event Go to selected day Full day

(12-hour) event scheduled Press M to open the Datebook Menu 102 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 103 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Datebook Day View Select a day in the week view and press VIEW (J) to see the days events. You can store, edit, view, copy, and delete any event from the day view. Untimed event Down scroll arrow Return to previous screen

THU 19-NOV Joe's B-day

9:00 A Marie,... BACK M VIEW Press M to open the Datebook Menu Event View Day of week Alarm Event Show event details Select an event in the day view and press VIEW (J) to open the detailed event view. You can edit, copy, and delete events from the event view. Alarm Down scroll arrow Return to previous screen A THU 9:00 am Marie, mtg about new product BACK M EDIT Day and time Event details Edit event Press M to open the Datebook Menu 103 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 104 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Datebook Storing a New Event A title is required for a datebook event. All other information is optional. Find the Feature M > Datebook > day M > New See Selecting a Feature on page 50 for instructions on scrolling to and selecting options. Press 1 2 CHANGE (J) keypad keys OK (J) 3 4 K 5 DONE (L) To select Title enter a title for the event (see Entering Text on page 53) store the event title scroll to other elds and enter information as necessary Other elds let you enter start time, duration, date, repeating events, and reminder alarm. store the new event and return to the day view 104 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 105 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Datebook Changing Event Information To change information about an existing event:

Find the Feature M > Datebook Press 1 K 2 3 K VIEW (J) VIEW (J) EDIT (J) 4 5 6 K 7 8 9 CHANGE (J) keypad keys DONE (L) To scroll to the scheduled event day display the day view scroll to the event you want to change display the event view edit the event scroll to the detail you want to change edit the information enter the new information store the information and return to the day view 105 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 106 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Datebook Copying an Event To copy information from a current event to a new event:

Find the Feature M > Datebook To scroll to the scheduled event day display the day view scroll to the event to copy open the Datebook Menu scroll to Copy copy the event conrm the copy Your phone assumes that you want to change the date, and displays the Date eld. enter the date information move to the month, day, and year save the copy of the event scroll to event details and edit the information as necessary store the new event and return to the day view VIEW (J) Press 1 K 2 3 K 4 M 5 K 6 7 SELECT (J) YES (J) keypad keys 8 9 } (J) DONE (L) 10 11 K 12 DONE (L) 106 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 107 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Datebook Deleting an Event Find the Feature M > Datebook VIEW (J) Press 1 K 2 3 K 4 M 5 K 6 SELECT (J) a K b SELECT (J) YES (L) 7 To scroll to the scheduled event day display the day view scroll to the event to delete open the Datebook Menu scroll to Delete select Delete For non-repeating events, go to step 7. For repeating events, the phone displays a delete event menu:

scroll to This Event Only or Repeat Events select the event(s) to delete conrm the deletion The phone briey displays a Deleted: message and returns you to the day view. 107 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 108 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Radio You can use your phone to tune, store presets, and listen to FM radio stations when you use the optional Motorola Original FM Stereo Radio Headset with your phone. Turning the Radio On and Off Press Radio (J) To turn the radio on and off Note: The Radio (J) soft key option appears only when the FM Stereo Radio Headset is plugged into the accessory connector port. Tuning a Station Do This Press K or Press and hold K To scroll up or down to the next frequency scroll up or down to the next available stereo station 108

User.Guide.GSM.book Page 109 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Radio Storing a Preset To store a station to a preset that you can recall later:

Do This Press and hold a number key (1 to 9) To assign its preset number to the tuned station Selecting a Preset To select a preset radio station:

Press a number key (1 to 9) To tune the station stored at that preset location Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On Your phone interrupts the radio signal and rings or vibrates as usual to notify you of an incoming call, message, or other event. When you receive a call:

Do This Press IGNORE (L) Press ANSWER (J) or Press the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone To ignore the call answer the call Note: You can use the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to converse with the other party during a call 109 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 110 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Radio To end the call and resume the FM broadcast:

To end the call Do This Press O or Press and hold the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone Turn the radio off before dialing outgoing calls. You do not have to turn off the FM radio feature to dial emergency numbers or numbers selected from your phonebook or other lists. Tip: To dial a recently called number, press N or the button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to go to the dialed calls list. For more information, see Recent Calls on page 79. 110 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 111 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesVoicemail You can listen to your voicemail messages by calling your network voicemail phone number. Voicemail messages are stored on the networknot on your phone. Contact your service provider for more details. Storing Your Voicemail Number Store your voicemail number in your phone to make it faster and easier to use voicemail. Your voicemail number is provided by your service provider. Find the Feature M > Messages M > VoiceMail Setup Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (J) To enter the phone number for your voicemail store the number Receiving a New Voicemail Message When you receive a voicemail message, your phone displays New VoiceMail &. (Some networks only indicate when you have messages, whether they are new or not.) If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder every ve minutes until you close the new message notication, listen to the message, or turn off your phone. (See Reminders on page 140.) 111 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 112 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesVoicemail From the new message notication:

Do This Press CALL (J) To call your voicemail phone number and listen to the message Listening to a Voicemail Message To listen to your voicemail messages at any time:

Find the Feature M > Messages > VoiceMail Your phone calls the voicemail phone number you stored. If you do not have a voicemail number stored, the phone guides you through storing a number. 112 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 113 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesText Text messages are brief messages that you can send and receive (such as Where are we meeting?). Received messages appear on your phone display or in your text message inbox. You must set up the text message inbox before you can send and receive these messages. The total number of messages the inbox can hold depends on the length of the messages, and the number of other messages and drafts stored in your phone. Note: Your service provider may have already programmed the text message inbox settings for you. Setting Up the Text Message Inbox Find the Feature M > Messages M > Text Msg Setup Press 1 K 2 CHANGE (J) 3 4 5 keypad keys OK (J) CHANGE (J) To scroll to Srvce Center No. change the Srvce Center No. which is provided by your service provider enter the phone number for the service center that handles your outgoing messages store your service center number change the Expire After period 113 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 114 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesText Press 6 keypad keys OK (J) CHANGE (J) 7 8 9 K 10 OK (J) 11 12 K CHANGE (J) 13 SELECT (J) 14 K 15 K 16 DONE (L) To enter the expiration periodthe number of days your network tries to send unreceived messages store the expiration period change the Reply Type scroll to the default type of replies you want to sendtext messages, or other formats store the reply type change the Cleanup setting scroll to the period of time that messages stay in your inbox select the cleanup period If you select Custom, continue. Otherwise, the procedure is complete. change the entry for the number or label switch between the number and the label store the custom cleanup period after you nish entering all information 114 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 115 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesText Receiving a Text Message Note: You must set up the text message inbox before you can receive text messages. See Setting Up the Text Message Inbox on page 113. When you receive a new message, your phone displays New Message X and gives an alert. If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder every ve minutes until you close the new message notication, read the message, or turn off your phone. (See Reminders on page 140.) When your inbox is full, any new message replaces the oldest unlocked message. From the new message notication:

Press READ (J) To open the message (or your text message inbox if there are multiple messages) Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message You can open your text message inbox to read, lock, or delete messages at any time. Messages in the text message inbox are sorted from newest to oldest. The oldest messages are deleted as new ones are added. If you want to save a message, you should lock it to prevent it from being overwritten as new messages are received. 115 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 116 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesText Find the Feature M > Messages > Text Msgs Press 1 K 2 3 READ (J) SAVE (Jright) or To scroll to the message you want

(d = unread and urgent, n = read, f = read and locked) open the message close the message without changes DELETE (Lleft) delete the message or M open the Text Msg Menu to perform other procedures as described in the following list The Text Msg Menu includes the following options:

Option Call Back Go To Reply Forward 116 Description Call the number in the message header or the message text. Go to a Web address (URL) in the message. Open a new text message, with the messages Reply To number in the To eld. Open a copy of the text message, with an empty To eld. User.Guide.GSM.book Page 117 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesText Option Lock/Unlock Store Number Delete or Description Lock or unlock the message. Open a new phonebook entry with the messages embedded number in the No. eld. Delete the message or all inbox messages. Press Yes (L) to conrm the deletion. Delete All Create Message Open a new text message form. Setup Open the inbox setup menu. Sending a Text Message You can create and send a text message to one or more recipients. The text message feature lets you manually enter each recipients phone number, or select one or more numbers from the phonebook or recent calls lists. Note: When you manually enter multiple phone numbers in the To eld, you must insert a space between each number. Press and hold 1 to insert a space as needed. Find the Feature M > Messages M > Create Message Press 1 CHANGE (J) To select To 117 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 118 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM MessagesText Press 2 keypad keys or BROWSE (J) 3 4 5 OK (J) CHANGE (J) keypad keys 6 7 OK (J) DONE (L) To enter one or more phone numbers where you want to send the message Tip: Remember to press and hold 1 to add a space between numbers that you enter manually. select one or more phone numbers from the phonebook or recent calls lists store the number(s) select Msg enter the text message (see Entering Text on page 53) Note: Message length is limited. When 40 or fewer characters remain, a two-digit counter at the top of the display shows how many are left. store the text message nish the message Your phone displays Send Message Now?

118 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 119 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Press 8 YES (J) or NO (L) MessagesText To send the message cancel the message or save it as a draft A saved message is stored in the drafts folder, where you can edit it and send it at a later time. Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages Text messages that you send are stored in the outbox. To view the contents of your outbox:

Find the Feature M > Messages > Outbox Messages are sorted from newest to oldest. The following icons indicate message status:

= sending in progress m = sending failed Y = delivered 119 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 120 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Shortcuts Your phone includes several pre-programmed shortcuts. You can create additional shortcuts, if you like, to mark frequently used menu items. Standard Shortcuts The following shortcuts are pre-programmed in your phone. You cannot edit or delete these shortcuts. Do This Press M, then press and hold M (within two seconds) Press M #

Press N Press O To zoom in/out your phones display view

(See Changing the Zoom Setting on page 30.) display your phone number go to the dialed calls list

(See Recent Calls on page 79.) exit the menu system, return to the idle display User-Settable Shortcuts You can create shortcuts to many menu features and applications. A shortcut takes you directly to the menu item, or performs the menu action (if applicable). 120 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 121 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Shortcuts Creating a Shortcut To assign a keypad shortcut:

Do This 1 2 To enter the menu system highlight the menu item Press M Scroll to the item to which you want to assign a shortcut Press and hold M open the shortcut editor 3 The phone displays:

Assign Shortcut for:

Item?

where Item is the name of the item you selected. view shortcut options change the keypad shortcut number, if necessary select the default keypad shortcut number and close the shortcut editor 4 5 Press YES (L) Press CHANGE (J) or Press DONE (L) 121 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 122 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Shortcuts Using Shortcuts You can use a shortcut from the idle display, while on a call, or while scrolling through a menu. Use a Keypad Shortcut If you know the shortcut number:

Press 1 M 2 the shortcuts number To open the menu go to the menu item, or perform the menu action Select a Shortcut From the List To select a shortcut from the shortcut list:

Find the Feature M > Shortcuts

> the shortcut you want 122 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 123 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Micro-Browser The micro-browser lets you access Web pages and Web-based applications (such as on-line banking, shopping, and games) on your phone. Contact your service provider to set up access, if necessary. Note: Your phone may be congured to use a high-speed GPRS

(General Packet Radio Service) network connection. This type of connection can be identied by a GPRS indicator in the idle display that disappears when you start a micro-browser session. If a W (connected call) indicator is displayed when you start a micro-browser session, your phone is using a standard voice channel connection. Your network connection charges may vary depending on the type of connection used. Starting a Micro-Browser Session To open the micro-browser:

Find the Feature M > Browser The micro-browser displays the home page set up by your service provider. Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to a bookmark or service, service, or application select the service Shortcut: If you open a text message with a Web address (URL) in it, you can go directly to the URL by selecting M > Go To. 123 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 124 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Micro-Browser If you are unable to establish a network connection with the micro-browser, contact your service provider. Interacting With Web Pages You can perform the following operations on a Web page:

Do This Press K Press K and then SELECT (J) Press keypad keys and then OK (J) Press K to scroll to a phone number on a Web page, then press N Press * and #

Press M To scroll through a text message scroll through and select items in a list enter requested information Tip: Press * to delete one letter at a time if you make a mistake. call the number from the micro-browser go back to the previous Web page open the Browser Menu 124 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 125 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Calculator You can use your phone as a convenient calculator and currency converter. Calculating Numbers Find the Feature M > Calculator Press 1 number keys 2 * (left) or

# (right) SELECT (J) 3 To enter a number in the calculator highlight a calculator function perform the highlighted function Selected function appears here Press *

(left) or

# (right) to highlight a function and to view unseen functions by scrolling left/

right Exit the calculator Calculator

. C

EXIT

M 0 x

Entered number Press *

(left) or

# (right) to scroll to other functions SELECT Perform the highlighted function Press M to open the Calculator Menu 125 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 126 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Calculator The calculator can perform the following functions:

Function

. C CE

x

MR MS MC Description Insert a decimal point Clear the calculation Clear entry (replaces the C function when you enter subsequent values in a calculation) Add Subtract Multiply Divide Divide the displayed value by 100 Calculate the exchange rate Change the entrys sign (positive/negative) Recall the value stored in memory Store the displayed number in memory Clear memory 126 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 127 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Calculator Converting Currency The currency converter works just like the calculator, but uses the $ (currency) function:

Find the Feature M > Calculator M > Exchange Rate Press 1 2 3 number keys OK (J) number keys 4 * (left) or

# (right) SELECT (J) 5 To enter the exchange rate store the exchange rate enter the amount to convert (amount to multiply by the exchange rate) highlight the $ function perform the conversion 127 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 128 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Games Your phone contains three games that you can play between phone calls. If you get an incoming call, message, alarm, or alert, the game ends automatically. Selecting and Starting a New Game Find the Feature M > Games Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to the game of your choice start the game When the game is over, you can play another session of the same game or return to the games menu. Press BACK (Lleft) To return to the games menu or NO (Lleft) NEW (Jright) or YES (Jright) start another session of the game you just played 128 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 129 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Games 7 A A Ending a Game You can end a game at any time. To end the game session and return to the games menu Press BACK (L) or O Playing a Game Blackjack In this classic Las Vegas card game, you play against the dealer to see who can get closer to 21 points without going over. Rules of the game With each new hand, the rst card is dealt to the dealer. The dealers cards are shown at the top of the display, and your cards are shown at the bottom. All face cards count as 10 points. All number cards count as the points shown on their face. An Ace counts as 11 points, unless that would put you over 21 points. Otherwise, an Ace is counted as 1 point. An Ace that was originally counted as 11 may later be counted as 1 point if it will bring your points under or equal to 21 points. An initial deal of an Ace and a card with a face value of 10 points counts as exactly 21 points or Blackjack. 129 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 130 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Games Blackjack automatically wins against any other hand that totals 21 points. If you score more than 21 points, you go bust or lose. If you get ve cards without going bust, you win. If you and the dealer have the same score, the dealer wins. You can ask for a hit or another card as long as you do not go bust. As long as the dealers total is less than 17 points, the dealer must continue to take a hit. How to Play When the game begins, you are dealt two cards. Based on their total face value, you can:

Press STAY (L) HIT ME (J) Mindblaster To see the results of the hand request another card Your goal is to guess a secret four-symbol code. You play by entering symbols into four spaces and then submitting a guess. Rules of the Game Your score is the number of guesses it takes to reveal the secret code. 130 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 131 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Games 7 A A When you submit a guess, you are given clues that indicate how many symbols you have identied correctly and how many are in the correct position. The position of the clues does not correspond to the location of the symbols.

= correct symbol in correct position

= correct symbol in wrong position

= wrong symbol in wrong position You can see a history of your last 10 guesses. Once you enter a symbol into a blank space, you can change the symbol but you cannot make the space blank again. When you correctly guess the four-symbol code, the display shows your score and the level of your next game. After you win one game, you progress from level 1 to level 2. After you win two more games, you progress from level 2 to level 3. When you exit the game or turn off the phone, you begin again at level 1. 131 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 132 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Games How to Play When the game begins, you see four blank spaces. To play the game:

Do This Press * (left) or

# (right) Press K Press GUESS (K) Select > and then press K To move from space to space place a symbol in a space submit a guess (when all four spaces contain symbols) scroll through and view a history of your last 10 guesses Paddleball In this test of endurance, your mission is move your paddle to strike a bouncing ball. The more you succeed, the smaller your paddle gets. Rules of the game Your score is the number of times your paddle hits the ball. You lose when the paddle misses the ball. How to play Press K 132 To move your paddle so that it hits the bouncing ball User.Guide.GSM.book Page 133 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings You can adjust a wide variety of phone settings to suit your needs. Ring/Vibrate Your phone rings or vibrates to notify you of an incoming call, message, or other event. This ring or vibration is called an alert. You can select one of ve different alert proles:

w Loud ring y Vibrate t Silent x Soft ring u Ring and vibrate The alert setting indicator in your display shows the current alert prole (see illustration on page 28). Each alert prole contains settings for ringer and keypad volume. It also includes alert tone settings for different events: incoming calls, text messages, voicemail messages, data calls, fax calls, alarms, and reminders. You can modify the settings in each prole. Select an Alert Prole Find the Feature M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate

> Alert Press 1 K To scroll to the alert prole you want to use 133 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 134 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Press 2 SELECT (J) To select the alert prole The phone displays the Changed: Alert message. Customize an Alert Prole You can customize a prole by changing the alerts used for specic events (such as incoming calls, text messages, etc.). Your phone includes a variety of preset alert tones and vibrations. Any changes you make are saved to the current alert prole. Tip: This feature also lets you set the proles ringer volume and keypad volume. Find the Feature M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate

> Alert Detail Press 1 K 2 CHANGE (J) 3 K 4 SELECT (J) To scroll to the event for which you want to set a new alert select the event The phone displays the list of available alerts. scroll to the alert you want for the event select the alert The phone displays the Changed: Event Alert message. 134 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 135 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Use the My Tones Feature The my tones feature lets you create up to 32 custom alert tones for your phone. The tones you create appear in the list of available alerts (see Customize an Alert Prole on page 134). Creating a Tone Find the Feature M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate

> My Tones Press 1 K 2 3 4 SELECT (J) CHANGE (J) keypad keys 5 6 7 8 9 OK (J) CHANGE (J) keypad keys OK (J) DONE (L) To scroll to [New Tone]

select [New Tone]

select Notes enter notes for the tone (see Entering Notes on page 136) store the notes select Name enter the name for the tone store the name store the tone 135 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 136 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Entering Notes To create a new tone, use the keypad keys to enter each note. Press a key multiple times to cycle through its available notes or options (pitch, octave, or length). The default setting for a new tone is a quarter note in octave two. Key 1 2 3 4 7 0

136 Display 1 2 3 A B C 2 D E F 3 G R

b q h w Description set octave one set octave two set octave three note A note B note C set octave two note D note E note F set octave three note G rest sharp at quarter note or quarter rest half note or half rest whole note or whole rest move cursor left move cursor right User.Guide.GSM.book Page 137 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Enter a note as follows:

Task Change the octave Select the note

(required) Change a note to a sharp or at Change a notes length Add a rest Listen to a new tone as you compose it Action Set the new octave (1, 2, or 3) before selecting the note. The new octave applies to the note and all following notes until you change it again. Press a keypad key to enter a note. Enter a sharp or at (# or b) after selecting the note. Some sharps and ats are played as standard notes. For example, B# is the same as C. Press K to scroll to valid notes when entering a new note. Set the new length (h, w, or q) after selecting the note. The new length applies to the note and all following notes until you change it again. Enter one or more rests (R characters) as needed in the tone sequence. You can set the length of the rest by entering an h, w, or q character after the rest, just as you can for a note. Press M to enter the Compose Menu, and select Play All to play the notes you have entered. 137 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 138 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Example Press these keys to play this sequence of notes and rests in octave three: C (quarter note), E at (quarter note), half rest, and G (whole note):

To Press 1 1 1 1 set octave three 2 2 2 2 enter a quarter note C 3 3 3 7 7 enter a quarter note E at 4 4 4 0 0 enter a half rest 5 4 0 0 0 enter a whole note G Display 3 C Eb Rh Gw Playing a Tone Find the Feature M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate

> My Tones Press 1 K 2 M 3 K 4 SELECT (J) To scroll to the tone you want to play open the My Tones Menu scroll to Play select Play The phone displays the playback meter and plays the tone. 138 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 139 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Press 5 PLAY (J) or To play the tone again CANCEL (L) return to the my tones list Editing a Tone You cannot edit the standard alert tones included with your phone. To edit a custom tone that you created:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate

> My Tones Press 1 K 2 3 K EDIT (J) 4 5 6 CHANGE (J) keypad keys OK (J) Deleting a Tone To scroll to the tone you want to edit open the tone details scroll to the details you want to edit

(Name or Notes) select the details you want to edit enter new text or notes (see Entering Notes on page 136) store the details You cannot delete the standard alert tones included with your phone. To delete a custom tone that you created:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate

> My Tones 139 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 140 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Press 1 K 2 M 3 K 4 5 SELECT (J) YES (L) Reminders To scroll to the tone you want to delete open the My Tones Menu scroll to Delete select Delete conrm the deletion Reminders are alerts that ring or vibrate to notify you about a voicemail or text message you have received, or a datebook event you have scheduled. To set or turn off reminders:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate

> Alert Detail > Reminders Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to the reminder alert you want:

Beep, Vibrate, or Off Beep or Vibrate sets the corresponding reminder alert type. Off turns off all reminders. select the reminder alert 140 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 141 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Call Forwarding Call forwarding sends your phones incoming voice, fax, and/or data calls directly to another phone number. Use call forwarding options to specify which calls your phone should forward. When you are ready to accept calls on your phone again, you can turn off call forwarding. Set Up or Cancel Call Forwarding The call forwarding options for voice, fax, or data calls are:

All Calls If Unavailable Detailed Off forwards all calls forwards calls if your phone is unavailable uses different forwarding numbers if you are out of range, unable to answer, or busy (voice calls only) does not forward calls Find the Feature M > Settings > Call Forward Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to the type of calls you want to forward

(Cancel All cancels all call forwarding and ends the procedure.) open the call forward details for that call type 141 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 142 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Press 3 K 4 5 K CHANGE (J) SELECT (J) 6 7 K 8 9 CHANGE (J) keypad keys or BROWSE (J) 10 OK (J) To scroll to Forward change the Forward option scroll to the call forward option you want store the option scroll to To (same for If Busy, If No Answer, or If Unreachable) change the phone number enter the forwarding phone number browse through your phonebook or other lists for the forwarding phone number store the forwarding phone number Note: You can repeat this procedure to enter forwarding information for other call types. Check Call Forwarding Status Your network may store call forwarding status for you. If you change your phones call forward settings (see Set Up or Cancel Call Forwarding on page 141), then you should conrm that the network call forward status matches your preferences. Find the Feature M > Settings > Call Forward

> Forward Status 142 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 143 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Press 1 K 2 View (L) To scroll to Voice, Fax, or Data calls conrm that the network settings are correct Reordering Menu Items You can customize the order of the items in your phones main menu, depending upon your usage. Find the Feature M > Settings > Other Settings

> Personalize > Main Menu Press 1 K 2 GRAB (L) 3 K 4 INSERT (L) To scroll to the menu item you want to move grab the menu item you want to move move the item up or down the menu insert the item in the new location 143 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 144 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Customizing a Soft Key Function You can relabel the soft keys (left L and right J) to access different main menu items from the idle display. Find the Feature M > Settings > Other Settings

> Personalize > Keys Press 1 K 2 3 K 4 CHANGE (L) SELECT (L) To scroll to Left or Right open the key editor scroll to the new key function conrm the new function The key will have the new function whenever the phone is idle. Hands-Free Use You can user your phone without using your hands by using the phone headset. Be sure that your phone is rotated open. You can also purchase an optional Motorola Original Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit for your car. This accessory provides an alternative way for you to use your phone without using your handset. Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the laws and regulations on the use of these products. 144

User.Guide.GSM.book Page 145 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Automatic Answer When you activate automatic answer and connect your phone to the Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit or phone headset, your phone automatically answers calls after two rings. Find the Feature M > Settings > Other Settings Press 1 K 2 3 K 4 5 K 6 SELECT (J) SELECT (J) SELECT (J) To scroll to Car Settings or Headset select the feature scroll to Auto Answer select Auto Answer scroll to On or Off conrm the setting Automatic Hands-Free You can set up your phone to automatically route calls to the Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit when it detects a connection. Find the Feature M > Settings > Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Auto Handsfree Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to On or Off conrm the setting 145 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 146 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Power-Off Delay When your phone is connected to the Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit, you can set it to stay on for a specied time period after you switch off the ignition. This keeps your phone from draining your vehicle battery by staying on indenitely, but leaves your phone on long enough that you do not have to re-enter your unlock code when you make short stops. Find the Feature M > Settings > Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Power-Off Delay Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to the time delay option you want conrm your selection Caution: If you select Continuous, the phone does not power off when you turn off the ignition. Be careful not to accidentally drain your vehicle battery if you select this option. 146 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 147 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Adjusting Your Settings Charger Time When your phone is connected to the Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit, you can set it to charge itself for a specied time period after you switch off the ignition. This helps ensure that the phone battery gets fully charged while the vehicle is parked. Find the Feature M > Settings > Other Settings

> Car Settings

> Charger Time Press 1 K 2 SELECT (J) To scroll to the charge time option you want conrm your selection 147 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 148 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Data and Fax Calls A Motorola Original data kit lets you transfer data between your phone and a computer or other external device. You can:

synchronize data between your phone and an external device with Starsh TrueSync software, a Motorola accessory product. See the TrueSync user guide for more information. Note: TrueSync software is designed to synchronize with basic features of many popular Personal Information Management (PIM) software and hardware products. use your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet Note: 56K modems are capable of receiving 56Kbps from a compatible service provider. Receiving is currently limited in the U.S. and Canada to 53 Kbps, and transmitting to 33.6 Kbps. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions. use your phone to send and receive data and fax calls on your computer or hand-held device. For more information about Motorola Original data kits, see the Motorola Web site at:

http://www.motorola.com/dataaccessories (United States) http://www.motorola.ca/dataaccessories (Canada) 148

User.Guide.GSM.book Page 149 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Data and Fax Calls Connecting Your Phone to an External Device Connect your phone to an external device (such as a computer or hand-held device) using a serial cable or a USB cable. Note: Not all devices are compatible with serial cable or USB cable connections. Check your external device for specications. Set Up a Cable Connection Attach a serial cable or Motorola Original USB cable to the phone and external device as follows. Note: Check your computer or hand-held device to determine the type of cable you need. Attaching a Serial Cable Use the interchangeable head on the Motorola Multi-Connect Serial Cable to connect a computer, Palm III device, or Palm V device to your phone. Do This 1 Plug the serial cable into the detachable head. Make sure that the Motorola logo on the detachable head and the metal shielding on the serial cable plug are both facing you. 2 With the Motorola logo and the phone both facing you, plug the detachable head into your phones accessory connector port. Plug the other end of the cable into the serial interface connection on the external device and tighten the screws. 3 149 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 150 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Data and Fax Calls Attaching a USB Cable Do This 1 Plug the end of the cable with the Motorola logo into your phones accessory connector port. Make sure that the logo and the phone are both facing you. Plug the other endthe USB connectioninto the USB port on the external device. 2 Install the Software Install the software from the CD-ROM that comes with your Motorola Original data kit. See the data kits user guide for more information. Sending a Data or Fax Call You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device to send data or a fax from the connected device. Use this feature to transfer data from your computer onto another device, and to synchronize phonebook and datebook information between your phone, computer, and/or hand-held device. Connect your phone (see Connecting Your Phone to an External Device on page 149) and do the following:

Do This 1 Check the phone To make sure that the phone is connected and powered on 150 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 151 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Data and Fax Calls Do This 2 Open the application on your computer 3 End the transfer on your computer To place the call through the application

(such as dial-up-networking or fax) Note: You cannot dial data or fax numbers through your phones keypad. You must dial them through your computer. close the call and connection when the transfer is complete Receiving a Data or Fax Call You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device to receive data or a fax. Use this feature to transfer data to your computer from another device. Transfer the Data or Fax Connect your phone (see Connecting Your Phone to an External Device on page 149). Your phone noties you when the data or fax call arrives, and transfers the call to the connected device. You must use the application running on the connected device to answer the call. 151 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 152 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Data and Fax Calls End the Data/Fax Connection When the data or fax transfer is complete:

Do This End the call from the connected device To close the connection Sending a Talk then Fax Call You can place a call where you talk and then send a fax to the same phone number within the same call. Connect to the device that will send the fax (see Connecting Your Phone to an External Device on page 149) and do the following:

To enter the phone number for the call open the Dialing Menu scroll to Talk Then Fax select Talk Then Fax (for the next call only) dial the call Speak and, when ready, initiate the fax transfer on the connected device. When transfer is complete, end the call from the connected device. keypad keys Press 1 2 M 3 K 4 SELECT (J) 5 N 152 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 153 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Security Assigning a New Code or Password Your phones four-digit unlock code is originally set to 1234, and the six-digit security code is originally set to 000000 at the factory. Your service provider may reset these numbers before you receive your phone. If your service provider has not reset these numbers, we recommend that you change them to prevent other users from accessing your personal information or modifying your phone settings. The unlock code must contain four digits, and the security code must contain six digits. Be sure to make a note of the new numbers. Notes:

Your service provider may retain your phones security code for customer service purposes. In this case, you will not be able to use phone features that require you to enter the security code (such as master clear, master reset, and the unlock code bypass feature). If the only password you can change is the unlock code, the New Passwords menu is unavailable and the Unlock Code option appears on the Phone Lock menu. In this case, open the unlock code editor by selecting: M > Settings

> Security > Phone Lock > Unlock Code. 153 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 154 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Security To change a code or password:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> New Passwords Press 1 K 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHANGE (J) keypad keys OK (J) keypad keys OK (J) keypad keys OK (J) To scroll to the code or password you want to change select the code or password enter your old code If you do not know your code, see If You Forget a Code or Password on page 155. submit your old code enter the new code assign the new code re-enter the new code conrm the new code 154 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 155 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Security If You Forget a Code or Password If you forget your security code (originally set to 000000), SIM PIN, SIM PIN2, or call barring password, contact your service provider. If you forget your unlock code, try entering 1234 or the last four digits of your phone number. If that does not work, do the following when you see the Enter Unlock Code message:

Press 1 M 2 3 keypad keys OK (J) To go to the unlock code bypass screen enter your security code submit your security code Locking and Unlocking Your Phone You can lock your phone manually or set your phone to lock automatically whenever you turn it off. When you try to use a locked phone, it asks you to enter the unlock code. A locked phone still rings or vibrates for incoming calls or messages, but you must unlock it to answer. You can make emergency calls on your phone even when it is locked. See Dialing an Emergency Number on page 38. 155 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 156 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Security Lock Your Phone Manually Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock > Lock Now Press 1 2 keypad keys OK (J) To enter your four-digit unlock code lock the phone Set Your Phone to Lock Automatically You can set your phone to lock every time you turn it off:

Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Phone Lock > Automatic Lock

> On Press 1 2 keypad keys OK (J) To enter your four-digit unlock code set the phone to lock automatically Unlock Your Phone At the Enter Unlock Code prompt:

Press 1 keypad keys 2 OK (J) 156 To enter your four-digit unlock code The unlock code is originally set to 1234. If necessary, see If You Forget a Code or Password on page 155. unlock your phone User.Guide.GSM.book Page 157 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Security Barring Calls Call barring lets you restrict outgoing or incoming calls. You can restrict all calls, calls to international numbers, or calls while roaming. Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> Call Barring Press 1 K 2 CHANGE (J) 3 K 4 5 6 SELECT (J) keypad keys OK (J) To scroll to Outgoing or Incoming calls select barring for Outgoing or Incoming calls scroll to a restriction for the barred calls select the restriction for the barred calls enter your call barring password submit your password 157 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 158 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Security Protecting the SIM Card Your PIN (Personal Identication Number) code protects the information stored on your SIM card. When the SIM PIN feature is activated, you must enter your SIM card PIN code each time you turn on the phone or insert a SIM card. Your SIM card PIN code is given to you by your service provider. Find the Feature M > Settings > Security

> SIM PIN Press 1 K 2 3 4 SELECT (J) keypad keys OK (J) To scroll to On or Off switch protection on or off enter your SIM card PIN code submit your code Unblock the SIM Card PIN Code If you enter an incorrect SIM card PIN code three times in a row, your SIM card is disabled and your phone displays the message SIM Blocked. You need to enter a PIN unblocking key (PUK) code, which you can obtain from your service provider. 158 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 159 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Security Note: In the following key sequence, each key press must occur within two seconds of the previous keypress. Caution: If the unblocking attempt is tried unsuccessfully 10 times, the SIM card is permanently disabled and your phone displays the message SIM Disabled. Press 1 # # 0 5

2 3 keypad keys OK (J) 4 keypad keys 5 OK (J) 6 7 keypad keys OK (J) To open the PIN unblocking editor Your phone prompts you to enter the PIN1 Unblock Sequence:. enter the PUK code submit the PUK code Your phone prompts you to Enter New SIM PIN:. enter a new SIM card PIN code Note: The SIM PIN code must be between four and eight digits in length. assign the new SIM PIN code Your phone prompts you to Re-enter New SIM PIN:. re-enter your SIM card PIN code conrm the new SIM PIN code and unblock the SIM card 159 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 160 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Check these questions rst if you have problems with your phone:

Question Is your battery charged? Do you see B in the display?

Is the phone set to the proper frequency for your geographical region?

Do you have a valid SIM card inserted in your phone?

Does the handset have a signal?

Do you see j in the display?

Is the earpiece volume too low?

Answer The battery level indicator should have at least one segment showing (C). If it does not, recharge your battery. (See Charging the Battery on page 22 and Battery Use on page 33.) Phones in different regions of the world use different frequencies to establish a network connection. If necessary, use the Network feature (see page 77) to reset your phones frequency to 900/1800 MHz when you travel to a new location. If necessary, turn off your phone and make sure that you have inserted a valid SIM card. (See Installing the SIM Card and Battery on page 19). The signal strength indicator should have at least one segment showing (1). If it does not, move to an area with a stronger signal to use your phone. While on a call, press the volume key on the side of your phone. 160 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 161 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Answer Your phone may be muted. Press UNMUTE (J) if necessary to unmute the phone. Also, make sure that your phones microphone is not blocked by its carrying case or a sticker. Dropping your phone, getting it wet, or using a non-Motorola battery or battery charger can damage the phone. The phones limited warranty does not cover liquid damage or damage caused from using non-Motorola accessories. Question Is the other party unable to hear you?

Has the phone been damaged, dropped, or gotten wet?

Was a non-Motorola battery or battery charger used?

The following refer to specic problems:

Problem My phone was stolen. To whom should I report this?

I forgot my password. Solution Report a stolen phone to the police and to your service provider (the company that sends you your monthly wireless service bill). See If You Forget a Code or Password on page 155. 161 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 162 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Problem I pressed the End/Power key, but nothing happened. The display says:

Insert SIM Card or Check SIM Card even though I have inserted my SIM card in the phone. The display says:

SIM Blocked. How do I unblock my SIM card?

The display says:

Enter Unlock Code. How do I unlock my phone?

Solution Be sure to press and hold O (the End/

Power key) until the display appears and you hear an audible alert (this could take a couple of seconds). If nothing happens, check that a charged battery is installed. (See Charging the Battery on page 22.) The SIM card may be incorrectly inserted. Check the SIM card to make sure that it is inserted properly. See Installing the SIM Card and Battery on page 19. Note: Be sure to turn your phone off and then back on after you re-insert the SIM card. Call your service provider (the company that sends you your monthly wireless service bill) to obtain the PIN unblocking key (PUK) code. See Unblock the SIM Card PIN Code on page 158. Enter the factory-preset unlock code

(1234), or the last four digits of your phone number. (See Locking and Unlocking Your Phone on page 155.) If this fails, call your service provider (the company that sends you your monthly wireless service bill). 162 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 163 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Problem My phone asks for an unlock code when I try to open a feature. My phone does not ring. My phone rings even though I selected the Silent (or Vibrate) alert prole. I tried to place a call and heard an alternating high/

low tone. Solution The application you want is locked. If you own the phone but do not know the unlock code, see If You Forget a Code or Password on page 155. If you see t or y in the display, then the ringer is turned off. See Ring/Vibrate on page 133. Also, the ringer may be set to Silent even though your phone is set to a ring alert prole. See Customize an Alert Prole on page 134. The ringer may be set to play a tone even though your phone is set to a silent alert prole. See Customize an Alert Prole on page 134. Your call did not reach the wireless system. You may have dialed the number too soon after turning the phone on. Wait until the display shows the name of your service provider before making a call. 163 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 164 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Problem I cannot send/

receive calls. My phone has poor reception and drops calls. I cannot hear others on my phone. 164 Solution Make sure that you have a phone signal

(see the Signal Strength Indicator item on page 28). Avoid electrical or radio interference, and obstructions such as bridges, parking garages, or tall buildings. Your phone also may have theCall Barring feature turned on. If you know the unlock code, you can change this setting in the security menu

(M > Settings > Security).Also, check to be sure your SIM card is installed and working Make sure that your antenna is not bent or damaged. Also, make sure you have a phone signal (see the Signal Strength Indicator item on page 28). Stay clear of any obstructions such as bridges, parking garages, or tall buildings. While on a call, press the volume key on the left side of your phone. Your phone display should show the volume increasing. Also, make sure that your phones earpiece is not blocked by its carrying case. User.Guide.GSM.book Page 165 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Problem I cannot open my inbox. How do I see the calls I sent or received?

My phone will not send voicemail commands, passwords, or other codes. Solution Before you can use text or information services messages, you must set up the appropriate inbox. See Setting Up the Text Message Inbox on page 113. To see the most recent calls you dialed or received, open the Recent Calls lists:

M > Recent Calls

> Received Calls or Dialed Calls Your phone sends commands and passwords as DTMF tones. You can set your phones DTMF tones to be Long, Short, or Off. If you have trouble sending numbers, check your DTMF setting. 1 From the idle display, press:

M > Settings

> Other Settings

> Initial Setup

> DTMF 2 3 Press K to scroll to Long or Short. Press SELECT (J) to select it. 165 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 166 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Problem My phones display is too light. My battery didnt last as long as I expected. What can I do to extend battery life?

I plugged the data cable into my phone but my phone did not beep. How do I know if the data cable is ready to go?

Solution You can use the Contrast Setting feature (see page 76) to change the level of contrast in your phone display. You can also use the Backlight feature

(see page 75) to change the length of time that your phones display backlight stays on, or to change the displays backlight color. Your batterys performance is affected by charge time, feature use, temperature changes, and other factors. For tips on extending your battery life, see Battery Use on page 33. The beep indicates that you are set up correctly. If you did not hear a beep, make sure that both ends of the data cable are connectedthe smaller end to your phone and the larger end to your computer. Finally, your computer may have deactivated the port to save power. Try opening an application that uses the port, like a fax or dial-up application, and your computer will automatically activate the port. 166 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 167 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Problem My phone beeped when I attached the data cable, but my fax and data applications dont work. When sending data with the data cable, why does the computer show a connection rate of 19200 Kbps?

I cant end my data call by closing the application on my computer. What can I do?

Solution Some wireless networks may not support data or fax transmission. If you are roaming on an unfamiliar network, this may be the case. Also, remember that data and fax transmission usually requires a subscription. Call your service provider for more information. 19200 Kbps is the data transfer rate of the connection between your computer and the phone in a standard CSD

(Circuit Switch Data) connection. The rate of the connection between your phone and the network is displayed on your phone, and will be either 14400 or 9600 Kbps. Note: A GPRS connection may have a higher data transfer rate. Try pressing O on your phone. Also try disconnecting the cable or turning off the phone. If possible, always close the connection through your computer. These alternative methods may disrupt the application on your computer. 167 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 168 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Troubleshooting Solution You may be in an area without service, or you may be connected to a network that does not support Internet access. Try again in a few minutes. The servers may be temporarily busy. Problem I launched the micro-browser but the display says: Service Not Available. I launched the micro-browser but the display says: Data Server Unavailable. 168 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 169 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Product Registration Online Product Registration:

http://www.motorola.com/warranty Product registration is an important step toward enjoying your new Motorola phone. Registering helps us facilitate warranty service, and permits us to contact you should your phone require an update or other service. Registration is not required for warranty coverage. Please retain your original dated sales receipt for your records. For warranty service of your Motorola Personal Communications Product you will need to provide a copy of your dated sales receipt to conrm warranty status. Thank you for choosing a Motorola product. Export Law Assurances This product is controlled under the export regulations of the United States of America and Canada. The Governments of the United States of America and Canada may restrict the exportation or re-exportation of this product to certain destinations. For further information contact the U.S. Department of Commerce or the Canadian Department of Foreign Affairs and International Trade. 169 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 170 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Specic Absorption Rate Data This model phone meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientic organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientic studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specic Absorption Rate, or SAR. Under the guidelines for your phone model, the SAR limit is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certied power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certied power level, the actual SAR of the phone while operating can be well below the

* The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue. The limit incorporates a substantial margin for safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 170 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 171 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the phone. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it is tested to conrm compliance with the guidelines. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) that conform to a uniform testing methodology determined by an expert standards body. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 0.97 W/kg and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.52 W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and regulatory requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the governmental requirements for safe exposure. 171 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 172 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index A accessories optional 11, 108, 144, 148 standard 19 accessory connector port 1 active line indicator dened 29 illustration 28 Add Digits feature 81 alert creating 135140 dened 133 indicators 30, 133 reminders 140 type, selecting 134 alert prole customizing 134 dened 133 setting 133134 alert setting indicator dened 30, 133 illustration 28 animation 76 application, locking 73 appointments. See datebook Attach Number feature 41, 81 automatic redial 172 turning on/off 75 using 3536 B backlight 75 barring calls 157 battery car kit charger time 147 charging 22 extending battery life 3334, 75, 76, 166 installing 19??

level indicator 23, 28, 29 meter 69 blackjack 129130 block cursor, dened 52 browse text mode 53 browser alerts 66 browser setup micro-browser browser setup 70 browser. See micro-browser C calculator 125127 calendar. See datebook call adding digits after phone number 81 alert prole, setting 133134 alert type, selecting 134 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 173 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index alert, creating 135140 answer options 72 answering 26 barring 157 call waiting 44 calling card 42 canceling 39 cost setup 71 costs 8586 credit limit 71 deleting 7981 dialed calls list 43, 7981 dialing 25 dialing a recent call 7981 emergency number 38 ending 25 hold 48 ignoring 39 in-call timer 7071 placing 25 prex digits, inserting 41 received calls list 43, 7981 receiving 26 recent calls 7981 sending 25 storing 7981 talk then fax 152 terminating 39 timing 83 transferring 4647 unanswered call 37 call barring 157 call cost information 8586 Call Failed message 35 call forwarding dened 141 status, checking 142143 using 141142 call timers described 83 resetting 84 viewing 84 call waiting activating/deactivating 72 using 44 caller ID incoming calls 36 outgoing calls 71, 81 calling card call 42 calling line identication. See caller ID car kit automatic answer 145 automatic hands-free 145 charger time 147 power-off delay 146 clock dened 30 illustration 28 codes. See passwords 173 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 174 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index computer connecting to phone 149150 synchronizing data 99, 148 conference call 45 contrast, display 76 cost trackers described 8586 resetting 86 viewing 86 credit available 69, 85 credit information 69, 85 currency converter 127 cursor 52 customer service, calling 65 customizing the menu 143 D data call connecting to external device 149150 receiving 151152 sending 150151 date, setting 74 datebook adding an event 104 alarm 104 calendar 102 changing event information 105 174 copying an event 106 day view 103 deleting an event 107 event view 103 reminders 104, 140 week view 102 Datebook Menu 102, 103 default passwords 153 deleting a call 7981 dialed calls list 43, 7981 dialing a number 25 Dialing Menu 152 display animation 76 backlight 75 contrast 76 described 2730 greeting 74 idle display 27 illustration 28 language 76 zoom setting 30 drafts folder 66 DTMF tones 76, 80, 81, 165 E earpiece illustration 1 volume, adjusting 31 emergency number 38 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 175 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index ip end key functions 1, 23, 25, 49 ending a call 25 Enter Unlock Code message open to answer call 72 turning the phone on 23 FM Stereo Radio Headset 155, 156 Entry Method menu 58 event alert 134 exchange rate, calculating 127 external device connecting to phone 149150 synchronizing data 99, 148 F factory settings, resetting 7677 fax call connecting to external device 149150 receiving 72, 151152 sending 72, 150151 talk then fax call 152 xed dial activating/deactivating 73 dened 6465 dialing numbers 6465 editing an entry 6465, 94 storing an entry 8890 ashing cursor, dened 52 108110 forwarding calls 141 4-way navigation keys 1, 49 frequency, changing 77, 160 G games 128132 GPRS indicator dened 29 displayed 123 illustration 28 GPRS, dened 123 greeting, display 74 H hands-free mode automatic answer 145 automatic call routing 145 charger time 147 dened 144 power-off delay 146 headset automatic answer 145 FM Stereo Radio Headset 108110 headset jack 1 175 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 176 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index Hide ID feature 81 hold a call 48 I idle display, dened 27 ignoring a call 39 in use indicator dened 28 illustration 28 inbox, text message 113114 in-call timer 7071 incoming call canceling 39 ignoring 39 terminating 39 Incoming Call message 36 indicators active line 28, 29 alert setting 28, 30, 133 battery level 23, 28, 29 GPRS 28, 29, 123 in use 28 menu 27, 28, 30 message waiting 28, 29 missed call 37 ring alert 30, 133 roam 28 signal strength 28 silent alert 30, 133 vibrate alert 30, 133 176 voice message waiting 28, 29 voice name 87 iTAP software activating 58 capitalization 61 deleting text 62 entering numbers 62 entering words 5961 punctuation 61 K key end 1, 23, 25, 49 4-way navigation 1, 49 left soft key 1, 49, 144 menu 1, 26, 49 right soft key 1, 49, 144 send 1, 25, 26, 49, 79 voice 9192 volume control 1, 31, 49 keypad answering calls 72 volume, setting 134 L language, setting 76 Last Calls Menu opening 80 options 8081 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 177 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index left soft key customizing 144 functions 1, 49 lock applications 73 phone 155156 SIM card 158 lock application feature 73 loud ring alert 30, 133 M making a call 25 master clear 77 master reset 76 menu Browser Menu 124 customizing 143 Datebook Menu 102, 103 Dialing Menu 152 entering text 5152, 5362 Entry Method menu 58 features 6378 language, setting 76 Last Calls Menu 8081 lists 50 locking applications 73 My Tones Menu 138, 140 navigating 10, 4950 Phonebook Menu 87 rearranging features 143 scroll feature 76 Text Msg Menu 116117 using features 10, ??52 menu indicator dened 27, 30 illustration 28 menu key 1, 26, 49 message browser alert 66 deleting 115117 dialing number from 40 drafts folder 66 inbox setup 113114 locking 115117 outbox 66, 119 reading 115117 receiving 115 reminders, text message 115, 140 reminders, voicemail 111, 140 sending 41, 117119 status 119 voicemail 111112 message waiting indicator dened 29 illustration 28 micro-browser browser alerts 66 Browser Menu 124 177 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 178 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index calling a phone number 124 dened 123 functions 124 go back to previous page 124 starting 123124 microphone 1 mindblaster 130132 missed call indicator 37 missed call, dialing 43 Missed Calls message 37 my telephone number 26, 48 my telephone numbers 69 my tones 135140 My Tones Menu 138, 140 N n character 42 network settings 77, 160 notepad dened 38 entering digits 38 retrieving digits 82 number, viewing your own 26, 48, 69 numeric text mode 53 O 1-touch dial 178 dened 40 setting preference 75, 101 using 40 optional accessory, dened 11 optional feature, dened 11 outbox 66, 119 P paddleball 132 passwords changing 153 default 153 if you forget a password 155 pause character 42 phone accessories, optional 11 accessories, standard 19 active line indicator 29 active phone line, changing 69 answer options 72 connecting to external device 149150 credit available 69, 85 credit information 69 credit limit 71 date, setting 74 erase user-entered information 77 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 179 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index feature specications 70 ip 23 frequency, changing 77, 160 keypad, answering calls with 72 language, setting 76 locking 155156 network settings 77, 160 1-touch dial 40 passwords 153, 155 reset all options 76 security code 155 specications 70 speed dial, using 39 startup greeting 74 time, setting 74 unlock code 155 unlocking 24, 155156 phone number active line indicator 29 adding digits after 81 attaching to prex digits 41 attaching two numbers 81 redialing 35 sending text message to 41 storing in phonebook 8890 viewing your own 26, 48, 69 phonebook attaching two numbers 81 capacity, checking 99 copying entries 9598 deleting an entry 95 dialing a number 92 editing an entry 94 entry name 87 elds 87 number type indicator 87 1-touch dial 40 phone number 87 prex digits, inserting 41 sorting entries 100101 speed dial number 39, 87, 8990 speed dial, using 39 storing an entry 8890 synchronizing entries 99, 148 voice name entry 9192 voice name indicator 87 Phonebook Menu 87 PIN code activating/deactivating 158 dened 158 protecting the SIM card 158 unblocking 158159 PIN2 code 65 predictive text entry 179 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 180 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index activating 58 capitalization 61 deleting text 62 entering numbers 62 entering words 5961 punctuation 61 prole customizing 134 dened 133 setting 133134 PUK code 158 Q quick dial setting number 74 using 65 R radio 108110 received calls list 43, 7981 receiving a call 26 recent calls 7981 redial automatic redial 3536 busy number 35 reminders datebook 104 setting 140 text message 115, 140 180 voicemail message 111, 140 right soft key customizing 144 functions 1, 49 ring alert creating 135140 indicators 30, 133 setting 133134 type, selecting 134 ring and vibrate alert indicator 30, 133 ringer setting 133134 volume, adjusting 31, 134 roam indicator dened 28 illustration 28 S scroll feature 76 security code 155 send key 1, 25, 26, 49, 79 sending a call 25 service dial dened 64 short message service. See text message shortcuts creating 121 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 181 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index standard 120 using 122 Show ID feature 81 signal strength indicator dened 28 illustration 28 silent alert indicator 30, 133 SIM applications 67 SIM Blocked message 24, 158 SIM card applications 67 dened 19 installing 19??

precautions 19 protecting 158 service phone numbers 64 SIM Blocked message 24, 158 SIM Disabled message 159 unblocking 158159 SIM Disabled message 159 SIM PIN code activating/deactivating 158 protecting the SIM card 158 unblocking 158159 SIM PIN2 code 65 SMS. See text message soft keys customizing 144 illustration 1, 49 soft ring alert 30, 133 speed dial changing number 8990 number, dened 39 sorting phonebook entries by 100 using 39 standby time increasing 33 storing a call 7981 symbol text mode 5758 symbols, entering 5758 synchronizing data 99, 148 T talk and fax call 72 talk then fax call 152 tap method text entry 5456 telephone number, viewing your own 26, 48, 69 text block cursor 52 browse mode 53 character chart 56 entering from keypad 5362 entry mode, changing 53 ashing cursor 52 181 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 182 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index iTAP software predictive text entry 5862 numeric mode 53 symbol chart 58 symbol mode 5758 tap method 5456 text message deleting 115117 dialing number from 40 inbox setup 113114 locking 115117 reading 115117 receiving 115 reminders 115, 140 sending 41, 117119 status 119 text mode, changing 53 Text Msg Menu opening 116 options 116117 time, setting 74 timers described 83 resetting 84 viewing 84 transfer a call 4647 TrueSync 99, 148 182 U unblocking the SIM card 158159 unlock phone 155156 unlock code 155 V vibrate alert indicator 30, 133 setting 133134 type, selecting 134 voice dial dialing a number 93 recording voice name 9192 voice key recording a voice name 9192 voice message waiting indicator 28, 29 voice name dened 91 phonebook indicator 87 recording 9192 voicemail number, storing 111 receiving 111112 volume User.Guide.GSM.book Page 183 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index earpiece 31 keypad 134 ringer 31, 134 volume key 31 volume keys 1, 49 W wait character 42 Web pages functions 124 viewing 123124 Z zoom setting 30 U.S. patent Re. 34,976 183 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 184 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Index 184 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 185 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Wireless Phone Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!

Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies the benets of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your rst responsibility. If you nd it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:

1 Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road. 2 When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motorola Original hands-free accessories available today. 185 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 186 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM 3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. 4 Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy trafc or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy trafc can be hazardous. 5 If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibilitydriving safely. 6 Dial sensibly and assess the trafc; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into trafc. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of re, trafc accident or medical emergencies.*

186 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 187 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM 9 Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you.*

10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken trafc signal, a minor trafc accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.*

* Wherever wireless phone service is available. 187 User.Guide.GSM.book Page 188 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM Check the laws and regulations on the use of wireless telephones and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For more information, please call 1-888-901-SAFE or visit the CTIA Web site at www.wow-com.com ITC00-011 188